Sap TM2

S4TM2
Planning and Execution in SAP

S/4HANA TM
.
.
PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK
INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING
.
Course Version: 17
Course Duration: 5 Day(s)
Material Number: 50157548
SAP Copyrights, Trademarks and
Disclaimers
© 2021 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the
express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other
countries. Please see http://global12.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx for additional
trademark information and notices.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.
These materials may have been machine translated and may contain grammatical errors or
inaccuracies.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only,
without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable
for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate
company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty.
In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business
outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality
mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’
strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are
all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any
reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal
obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to
various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations.
Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak
only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.
© Copyright. All rights reserved. iii

Typographic Conventions
American English is the standard used in this handbook.

The following typographic conventions are also used.
This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation
Demonstration
Procedure
Warning or Caution
Hint
Related or Additional Information
Facilitated Discussion
User interface control Example text
Window title Example text
iv © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Contents
vii Course Overview
1 Unit 1: Transportation Management Overview
3 Lesson: SAP TM Overview and Evolution

9 Lesson: Deployment Options and Migration Paths
13 Lesson: End-to-End Transportation Process
19 Unit 2: Transportation Management Master Data
21 Lesson: Business Partners

25 Lesson: Transportation Network
38 Lesson: Transportation Resources
43 Exercise 1: Create Resources
51 Lesson: Schedules and Default Routes
55 Exercise 2: Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier Schedule
63 Unit 3: Creation of Transportation Requirements
65 Lesson: Defining Transportation Relevance for Orders and

Deliveries
69 Lesson: Creating Freight Units
77 Exercise 3: Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit Building
Rules
85 Exercise 4: Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders
93 Lesson: Conditions and Incompatibilities
100 Lesson: Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries
105 Exercise 5: Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery
Creation
110 Lesson: Building Packages
119 Exercise 6: Configure Package Building and Create Packages
based on Sales Orders
128 Lesson: Understanding Change Controller
133 Exercise 7: Explore Change Controller Strategies
141 Unit 4: Transportation Planning Preparation
142 Lesson: Transportation Planning

151 Exercise 8: Create Freight Order Types
157 Lesson: Selection and Planning Profiles
161 Exercise 9: Create a Selection Profile
169 Exercise 10: Create a Planning Profile
176 Lesson: Transportation Cockpit
183 Exercise 11: Configure a Transportation Cockpit Layout
© Copyright. All rights reserved. v

195 Unit 5: Interactive Transportation Planning
196 Lesson: Performing Interactive Planning

203 Exercise 12: Create Freight Orders Interactively
211 Lesson: Practice Freight Order Scheduling
215 Exercise 13: Schedule Freight Orders
227 Unit 6: Automatic Transportation Planning
228 Lesson: Plan with the VSR Optimizer

237 Exercise 14: Configure and Execute VSR Optimization
249 Exercise 15: Analyse the VSR Explanation Log
260 Lesson: Plan via Hubs
265 Exercise 16: Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation
Proposals
273 Unit 7: Subcontracting, Load Planning, and Short-Cut-Process
274 Lesson: Carrier Selection

287 Exercise 17: Execute Carrier Selection
295 Lesson: Load Planning
301 Exercise 18: Configure and Execute Load Planning
309 Lesson: Short-Cut Process
311 Exercise 19: Configure and Execute the Short-Cut Process
323 Unit 8: Transportation Execution
325 Lesson: Transportation Units and Service Orders

330 Lesson: Warehouse Integration
335 Exercise 20: Pick Delivery and Post Goods Issue
341 Lesson: Advance Shipping and Receiving
346 Lesson: Output Management
349 Exercise 21: Create Configuration of Output Management and
Print Outputs
359 Lesson: Track & Trace
366 Lesson: Discrepancy Management
371 Exercise 22: Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a
Discrepancy
vi © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Course Overview
TARGET AUDIENCE
This course is intended for the following audiences:
● Systems Architect
● Application Consultant
● Industry / Business Analyst Consultant
● Super / Key / Power User
● Business Analyst
● Solution Architect
● User
© Copyright. All rights reserved. vii

viii © Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 1 Transportation Management
Overview
Lesson 1
SAP TM Overview and Evolution 3
Lesson 2
Deployment Options and Migration Paths 9
Lesson 3
End-to-End Transportation Process 13
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand the SAP TM evolution and timeline

● Describe the differences between basic shipping and advanced Transportation
Management
● Understand SAP TM deployment options and migration paths
● Describe the end-to-end transportation processes
© Copyright. All rights reserved. 1

Unit 1: Transportation Management Overview
2 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 1
Lesson 1
SAP TM Overview and Evolution
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Management
SAP TM Overview and Evolution

SAP Transportation Management
Companies have been shipping products across countries and continents for centuries. The
concept of managing the transportation of products is not new. However, using new
methodologies and technology can make a difference in an industry. Today, most economies
are wholly reliant on efficient transportation logistics.
With the shift in recent years towards a global economy, crossing borders has become
commonplace. Reaching customers in more remote locations and sourcing the procurement
of product from multiple vendors or locations has increased the cost of transporting
products. As the world becomes smaller, the team tasked with maintaining logistics needs to
respond faster and more cost-effectively.
Global natural disasters and other dangers show the vulnerability of the global supply chain.
Despite these challenges, the transportation part of the supply chain, in particular, has to
solve the problems that arise in order to keep factories running and customers supplied.
The following figure provides a high-level overview of TM:
Figure 1: Comprehensive Transportation Management Coverage

Animation: Comprehensive Transportation Management Coverage

For more information on Comprehensive Transportation Management Coverage,
please view the animation in the lesson SAP TM Overview and Evolution, online in
the SAP Learning Hub.
A typical transportation process starts with order management. Order management is the
process of creating a transportation requirement. Transportation requirements can be sales
orders, purchase orders, deliveries, and so on. In a second step, these transportation
requirements are planned. SAP TM offers manual planning functions, optimizer planning, and
semi-automated processes (transportation proposal creation). Different aspects of planning
supported by SAP TM are means-of-transport selection (for example, rail versus road),
carrier selection based on real carrier rates, load optimization (3D-planning of container/
truck utilization). Once the planning process is finished, SAP TM also supports the execution
of transports. Execution includes delivery creation, document creation (print or electronic,
like waybills), event management integration (track and trace), as well as warehouse
integration (EWM integration). If you do not operate your own fleet, you need to make sure
that the external carrier is paid for their services. SAP TM allows you to maintain freight
agreements, calculation sheets, and rate tables to accurately define real carrier costs, which
can be used for charge calculation (already in the planning phase, carrier selection), but also
for settlement processes after the transport has been executed. Analytic and reporting
functionalities complete the available functions of SAP TM.
Evolution of SAP Transportation Management

The transportation solution that was released as part of SAP R/2 was in the first logistics
solution release by SAP. In 1993, SAP R/3 logistics execution (LE-TRA) was released.
Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling TPVS was released in 2000 and it enabled
transportation network optimization. SAP TM 6.0 and 7.0 evolved from the SAP
Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TPVS) solution. With SAP TM 8.0/8.1, the
architecture was redesigned and simplified. It focused on Shippers and LSP processes. SAP
TM9.0 was focused on Air Freight forwarding. As time went on, customer feedback and
lessons learned from the early implementations were used as a basis for improving the
solution and further versions of SAP TM were developed. As society and business make the
move to mobile, SAP TM is evolving accordingly and now includes several mobile-friendly
elements. For example, drivers can input updates using mobile devices and this information
can be used to update customers of possible delays. While previous iterations included
integration with Global Trade Services (GTS) and facilitated compliance, the focus more
recently has been on improving the shipper and freight forwarder elements of SAP TM.

Lesson: SAP TM Overview and Evolution
Figure 3: SAP TM Evolution
Animation: SAP TM Evolution

For more information on SAP TM Evolution, please view the animation in the
lesson SAP TM Overview and Evolution, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
From SAP S/4HANA 1709, Transportation Management becomes part of S/4HANA

Enterprise Management. It offers a much more comprehensive and sophisticated
functionality in the domain of transportation. Use of its advanced functions requires an
additional license. However, it can also be used with limited scope, that is, offering the same
capabilities that have been offered by LE-TRA. Use within this limited scope does not require a
specific license.
The software component LE-TRA that provided transportation-related content in SAP ECC is
part of the compatibility scope (SAP Note 2269324 – Compatibility Scope Matrix for SAP S/
4HANA on-premise). That means that its code line is kept within SAP S/4HANA Enterprise
Management until the end of 2025. The functionality offered from this component is called
basic shipping.
Both technical applications are independent of each other and can then be used next to each
other on the same SAP S/4HANA database instance. They have no data exchange/
integration within the shipping process. Long term, the collection of basic shipping processes
will only be realized by using selected functions of SAP S/4 HANA TM. The shipment from LE-
TRA will be replaced by the freight order from SAP TM.

Figure 5: Basic Shipping and LE-TRA
Differences Between Basic Shipping and Advanced Transportation

Comparison of Basic Shipping and Advanced Transportation
Figure 6: Comparison of Basic Shipping and Advanced Transportation
Advanced TM addresses not only the shipping industries, but also freight forwarders. It allows
early planning based on orders (sales orders, purchase orders, MM scheduling agreements)
in addition to planning based on deliveries (outbound and inbound), which is the only option in
basic shipping. Combined planning of inbound and outbound deliveries within one freight
order is allowed in the advanced transportation option. Sophisticated planning and
optimization options in the domain of vehicle scheduling and routing, carrier selection, load
consolidation and load planning are key differentiators between advanced transportation and
basic shipping.

Lesson: SAP TM Overview and Evolution
Detailed Description of Functional Difference

Sources of information, whether specific functionality relates to basic shipping or advanced
transportation scope, is defined in the SAP S/4HANA 1909 Feature Scope Description
document.
Basic shipping is defined as follows:
Transportation Management in SAP S/4HANA supports the entire transportation chain. You
can manage the transportation demands by planning, tendering, and settlement of freight
processes. Also, you can book carriers in accordance with the requirements of hazardous
goods. Transportation Management supports the following end-to-end processes:
● Domestic and international transportation for the shipper industry
● Inbound and outbound freight management
Advanced Transportation Management is defined as follows:

Advanced Transportation Management (TM) in SAP S/4HANA supports the entire
transportation chain. You can manage the transportation demands by planning, optimizing,
tendering, subcontracting, and settlement of freight processes. Also, you can book carriers in
accordance with the requirements of international trade and hazardous goods. TM supports
the following end-to-end processes:
● Domestic and international transportation
● Inbound and outbound freight management based on sales orders, purchase orders,
deliveries, stock transport orders, and returns
● Embedded analytics and key performance indicators for real-time performance visibility
Furthermore, SAP note 2868497 provides a detailed overview and comparison between LE-
TRA, basic shipping TM and advanced transportation management scope.
Best Practice Scenarios

Best practices have been defined for the implementation of basic shipping scenarios. The
following notes describe the details:
● 2563537 - SAP Best Practices for S/4HANA Supply Chain for Transportation Management
– Outbound Transportation (Basic Shipping Scenario) 1709
– Stock Transport Orders (Basic Shipping Scenario) 1709
● 2606349 - SAP Best Practices for S/4HANA Supply Chain for Transportation
Management – Inbound Transportation (Basic Shipping Scenario) 1709
Management – Combination of Inbound and Outbound Transportation (Integrated
Transportation Management) 1709
Management – Outbound Transportation (Basic Shipping Scenario) 1809
Management – Inbound Transportation (Basic Shipping Scenario) 1809

Management – Combination of Inbound and Outbound Transportation (Integrated
Transportation Management) 1809
– Inbound Transportation (Basic Scenario) 1909
– Outbound Transportation Scenario 1909
– Combination of Inbound and Outbound Transportation (Advanced Transportation
Management) 1909
– Stock Transport Orders (Basic Scenario) 1909
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Management

Unit 1
Lesson 2
Deployment Options and Migration Paths
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Deployment Options
The initial release of SAP TM was on SAP NetWeaver or SCM server and used as a separate
application interfacing with SAP ECC. Since SAP S/4HANA 1709, SAP Transportation
Management is part of SAP S/4HANA (embedded TM), which also supports side-by-side
scenarios, meaning that demand can be received from other SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA
instances. Depending on which system is currently implemented, the following scenarios can
used by used to migrate to SAP S/4HANA:
● SAP ERP with SAP TM 9.x: Classic business suite integration of SAP TM and SAP ERP
● SAP S/4HANA with SAP TM 9.x: SAP S/4HANA ERP using SAP TM side car solution. Side-
by-side integration of SAP S/4HANA and the business suite
● SAP S/4HANA ERP with SAP S/4HANA TM: SAP S/4HANA ERP system with
decentralised SAP S/4HANA TM system
● SAP ERP with SAP S/4HANA TM: SAP ERP with side-by-side SAP S/4HANA TM – for
customers not yet converted to SAP S/4HANA ERP
Animation: Deployment Scenarios

For more information on Deployment Scenarios, please view the animation in the
lesson Deployment Options and Migration Paths, online in the SAP Learning Hub.

Figure 8: Deployment Scenarios 1 & 2
Figure 9: Deployment Scenario 3 & 4
No interface is obviously required if SAP TM is used "embedded", because in this case, all
relevant master data objects are available in SAP S/4HANA, and following the "principle of
one", no replication is required. If SAP TM is used in a "side-by-side" deployment, the
interface used to transfer master data from an SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA system to SAP TM
or SAP S/4HANA TM depends on the destination system. If the receiving system is an SAP
TM 9.x (Business Stack), then CIF (core interface) is used. If the receiving system is an SAP
S/4HANA system, then DRF (data replication framework) is used.

Lesson: Deployment Options and Migration Paths
Figure 10: Migration Path and Deployment Options
LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 1
Lesson 3
End-to-End Transportation Process
LESSON OBJECTIVES
End-to-End Transportation Processes

Transportation Management - Object Overview
Figure 11: End-to-End Process/Document Flow
The figure, End-to-End Process/Document Flow, gives an overview of the SAP TM document
model. Depending upon the extent of your integration and business requirements, different
objects, documents and statuses are available. Different types of transportation requests can
be created in SAP TM by the execution or order management system. The documents that
are the basis for freight unit creation depend on your business scenario and deployment of
SAP TM, as follows:

● If you are a shipper and you have deployed SAP TM in a side-by-side scenario, (sales/
purchase) orders from your SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA system are the basis for order-
based transportation requirement creation in SAP TM.
● If you are a shipper and you have deployed SAP TM in a side-by-side scenario, (outbound/
inbound) deliveries from your SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA system are the basis for
delivery-based transportation requirement creation in SAP TM.
● If you are a shipper and you have deployed SAP TM in an embedded scenario, (sales/
purchase) orders from your SAP S/4HANA system are directly the basis for freight unit
creation in SAP TM (no replication of data required).
● If you are a shipper and you have deployed SAP TM in an embedded scenario, (outbound/
inbound) deliveries from your SAP S/4HANA system are directly the basis for freight unit
creation in SAP TM (no replication of data required).
● If you are a logistics service provider/forwarder, you create forwarding orders in SAP TM
directly (or based on forwarding quotations).
Upon receiving transportation requirements, freight units are created and become the basic
element for planning the movement of goods through the network. The freight unit is a
transport unit used in planning. It could be a pallet or container, but it could also be two pallets
that need to be transported together, for example, for customs reasons.
Freight orders will record the manual or system-generated transportation planning
(intermodal) activities. These freight orders are the result of planning, consolidation of freight
units on a vehicle, booked capacity, or scheduled means of transport. Once freight orders are
created, carriers are assigned. Once this has been completed, transport order execution can
be triggered and follow-on settlement processing can begin.
Order Management
The business purpose of order management is providing the ability to handle transportation
requests, which are designated as requirements or demands from an ordering system.
One of the major benefits of SAP TM is the ability to use the system integrated to SAP ERP or
SAP S/4HANA as the source demand system ("side-by-side") or as a component within SAP
S/4HANA ("embedded"). So you can see the flexibility with SAP TM from an order
management standpoint. If you choose to integrate with an SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA
system, SAP TM would be integrated by means of Process Integration (PI) interfaces. Orders
and deliveries from SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA can be converted into SAP TM transportation
requirements automatically. LSP forwarding order creation is either done by manual entry in
the SAP TM UI, or integrated from a customer's system via EDI.
You can use the Forwarding Order Management component in SAP TM to create, edit, and
confirm the forwarding orders from your ordering parties. In addition to creating the
forwarding order, you can also enter the data as a forwarding quotation and send it to the
ordering party. You can then create a forwarding order based on the forwarding quotation.
Transportation Planning
You can use the Freight Order Management component in SAP Transportation Management
to create and edit freight orders and freight bookings. You use freight orders for land
transportation and you use freight bookings for sea and air transportation.
Freight orders and bookings are the result of transportation planning.
One of the major benefits of SAP TM is the ability to perform advanced planning activities.
SAP TM has been developed as a planning and execution system desired to support

Lesson: End-to-End Transportation Process
transportation-related activities for several different industries. Some of the planning

processes delivered with SAP TM are as follows:
● Vehicle Scheduling and Route Optimization
● Load Consolidation
● Load Planning
● Carrier Selection
● Freight Tendering
Transportation Execution
In addition to advanced planning capabilities in SAP TM, your organization can also gain the
added benefit of integration execution activities in SAP TM.
These integration tasks include the following:
● Integration with SAP Event Management (EM) for alerts and transportation tracking
● Trigger generation of delivery documents
● Integration with dangerous goods management
● Document printing
● Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management (EWM)
● Realtime analytics
Charges and Settlement

When working with customers or subcontractors, it may be necessary to collect or pay fees in
relation to the movement of products. With SAP TM, it is possible to introduce a settlement
process in addition to planning and execution activities. The settlement process supports the
following tasks:
● Ability to define transportation charges
● Definition of freight or forwarding agreements
● Generation of settlement documents
● Posting of settlement documents and purchase order / service-entry-sheet generation
● Cost distribution
● Customer billing
LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 1
Learning Assessment
1. Which functions are part of the basic shipping scope?

Choose the correct answers.
X A Delivery-based planning
X B Order-based planning
X C Manual carrier selection
X D Automatic carrier selection using the optimizer
2. Which documents are relevant for the basic shipping scope using SAP S/4HANA Supply
Chain for Transportation Management?
X A Shipment
X B Sales Order
X C Outbound Delivery
X D Freight Order
3. If SAP TM is used in a "side-by-side" deployment, the interface used to transfer master

data from an SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA system to SAP TM or SAP S/4HANA TM
depends on which of the following?
X A Source system
X B Destination system
X C Both source and destination system

Unit 1: Learning Assessment
4. Which of the following are the main functional areas of SAP Transportation Management?
X A Order Management
X B Transportation Planning
X C Transportation Execution
X D Charges and Settlement
5. Which of the following are valid deployment options for SAP TM?
X A SAP ERP to SAP TM ("side-by-side")
X B SAP ERP to SAP S/4HANA TM ("side-by-side")
X C SAP S/4HANA to SAP S/4HANA TM ("side-by-side")
X D SAP S/4HANA to SAP TM ("side-by-side")
X E SAP S/4HANA ("embedded")

UNIT 2 Transportation Management
Master Data
Lesson 1
Business Partners 21
Lesson 2
Transportation Network 25
Lesson 3
Transportation Resources 38
Exercise 1: Create Resources 43
Lesson 4
Schedules and Default Routes 51
Exercise 2: Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier Schedule 55
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand the business partner concept and categories

● Explain the transportation network
● Understand resource and resource types
● Understand carrier schedules and routes

Unit 2: Transportation Management Master Data

Unit 2
Lesson 1
Business Partners
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Business Partners
The master data of customers and vendors is managed in SAP S/4HANA by using business
partner master data. By using this approach, it is possible to centrally maintain the master
data for customers and vendors (in SAP ERP they have been handled separately).
Figure 12: Business Partner Category
Animation: Business Partner Category

For more information on Business Partner Category, please view the animation
in the lesson Business Partners , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business partner master data can be maintained with the transaction BP or by using a
corresponding app from the SAP Fiori launchpad. Business partners can be assigned multiple
company codes. Business partners can be categorized as a person, group, or organization. An
organization represents units such as a company, a department of a company, or an
association. Organization is an umbrella term to map every kind of situation in the day-to-day
business activities. A group represents a shared living arrangement, a married couple, or an
executive board.

Figure 14: Business Partner Roles
Animation: Business Partner Roles

For more information on Business Partner Roles , please view the animation in
the lesson Business Partners , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
The link between a business partner and other components is achieved by a role concept. A
business partner role corresponds to a business context in which a business partner can
appear. Relevant business partner roles related to shipping process are:
● Business Partner general (000000)
● Customer (FLCU01)
● FI customer (FLCU00)
● Vendor (FLVN01)
● FI vendor (FLVN00)
● Invoicing Party (BBP006)
● Carrier (CRM010)
This ensures that the relevant master data for the various processes can be recorded
correspondingly and that the business partner can be used for the relevant functions (such as
sold-to party).
You define the general business partner data once and assign business partner roles (BP
roles) to the business partner. Specific data is stored for each business partner role. In this
way, you do not store redundant data, since the general data is independent of a business
partner’s function or application-specific extensions. When you first create a business partner
in the system, the BP role General Business Partner is automatically assigned to the business
partner.

Lesson: Business Partners
Figure 16: Partner Functions
Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the functions of particular
partners in the process. A partner function is a particular role that a business partner can take
during the process. For example, one customer orders some products (partner function: sold-
to-party and another customer receives the material (partner function: Ship-to-party). One
partner may have several functions. For example, when all the partner functions within the
customer partner type are assigned to one business partner, the same customer is the sold-
to-party, ship-to-party, payer, and bill-to-party.
The following is a list of partner functions commonly used in the shipping process:
● Consignee
● Bill-to-party
● Carrier
● Shipper
● Ordering party
● Driver
● Payer
● Freight forwarder
Additional text can be defined for the business partner master data and you can use them as
the printing address. The same business partner number can be maintained across multiple
company codes.
Drivers: Drivers operate vehicles. They are defined as business partner with the role driver.
Attributes like driver qualifications, shift sequence, validity period, home location, and
absences can be maintained.
Business Partner Determination

The system can be enabled to determine business partners for various document types. This
allows users to easily and efficiently enter business partners in a business document. It cuts

down on the chance of manual errors, and reduces the need to enter a business partner for
each partner function.
In Customizing for Transportation Management under Master Data → Business
Partners → Define Partner Determination Profiles, you can create a partner determination
profile that the system uses to automatically determine the following features:
● Users can specify the list of partner functions that the system makes available in a
business document.
● The level of control the user has in entering the partner function can be defined. Depending
on the settings defined in Customizing, users can change or delete a partner function, or
add a partner function from a list of available partner functions. Settings can be specified
so that users cannot change or delete specific partner functions.
● Users can enable the system to automatically determine business partners based on
specific Incoterms.
● Users can enter a specific static business partner in the profile directly.
You can assign the business partner determination profile to document type customizing (for
example, freight order type customizing) to facilitate automatic business partner
determination.
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 2
Lesson 2
Transportation Network
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Location Master
A location is a logical or physical place in which resources are managed on a quantity basis.
This business object is used as the basis for the transportation processes in which you name
a source location, a destination location, and any transshipment locations necessary to
complete it.
Different customizing entries and master data elements from SAP S/4HANA are displayed in
SAP TM as locations with different location types. SAP S/4HANA plants, customers, vendors,
and shipping points are integrated with SAP TM and become the following types of location:
Plants-1001 (production plant) or 1002 (distribution center), Business Partners- 1021
(business partners), and Shipping Points-1003 (shipping point). The following location types
exist:
ID Location Type
1001 Production Plant
1002 Distribution Center
1003 Shipping Point
1021 Business Partner
1030 Terminal
1040 Store
1100 Port
1110 Airport
1120 Railway Station
1130 Container Freight Station
1140 Hub
1150 Gateway
1160 Container yard
1170 Warehouse
1180 Carrier Warehouse

ID Location Type
1190 Rail Junction
1191 Border Crossing Point
If you are using SAP TM in SAP S/4HANA, no integration is required – material master and
business partners are already available. Location master data is created on the fly or via a
report when needed. In traditional SAP TM 9.6 deployment, the location type is automatically
determined based on the object being transferred from SAP S/4HANA. In the SAP S/4HANA
system, each inventory-relevant location can be assigned one or more shipping points. A
shipping point is an independent organizational unit at a fixed location that processes and
monitors inbound and outbound deliveries. The physical address of a shipping point is
represented as a location in master data.
Transshipment locations are used for unloading goods from one freight order and loading
them onto another freight order during the transportation process. This function is necessary
when different means of transport or different transportation service providers (carriers)
have to be used to execute a transportation process, for example, truck-ocean-truck; truck-
rail-truck. Transshipment locations may also be used when consolidating or de-consolidating
goods to be transported.
Geocoding Locations
Locations are critical elements of your transportation network, because they identify source
and destination points. Based on where these two points are located, SAP TM can use
distance and duration to calculate the best means of transporting a product.
Geographical information plays an important role in TM. Almost all business processes relate
to it. High-quality geodata improves these processes. The SAP TM Transportation Network is
the foundation of a transportation planning process.
To see geographic information related to location master data, log into SAP Fiori, then choose
Master Data folder → Define Location.
Figure 17: Location Geocoding
A location is a specific point on the earth's surface that is defined by the geographical
coordinates of longitude, latitude, and altitude. These coordinates are determined from the
address data of a location. An address can contain a country, region, postal code, city,

Lesson: Transportation Network
district, street, and house number, as well as additional fields. Determining geographical
coordinates from address data is called geo-coding. A geographical information system can
be used to get precise geographical coordinates.
In SAP TM, the location master data object describes the geographical setup of the
transportation network underlying business processes. Location can store an address and the
geographical coordinates that define its position. The accuracy of the geo-coordinates
depends on the address data provided and which service is used to determine them.
Standard SAP applications automatically determine a geo-coordinate at region level when
creating or changing the location address data. This is sufficient for processes not working
with static information or depending on distances, times, or map display. Because geo-
coordinates are the basis for distance and duration determination and map display, they must
be high quality in case those functions are required.
Geo-coordinates are displayed in degrees, minutes, and seconds in the Geographical Data
area of the Location user interface and can be overwritten manually by the user. The Precision
field indicates the granularity of the geo-coding result.
A geocoder determines the geographical coordinates (longitude and latitude) from a given
address. The following two levels of geocoding are possible in SAP TM:
1. Standard (included in the SAP TM software license)
2. Full addresses (depending on capabilities of geocoding software)
The geocoding program supplied by SAP determines the longitude and latitude based on the
country and region code. There are several companies who provide geocoding products,
including the following: Google, Here, Rand-McNally, PC-Miler, and PTV (Karlsruhe,
Germany).
Transportation Zone
Transportation zones are used to group individual locations. All the properties of zones are
transferred to its locations. Transportation zones are typically used as the origin and
destination points for transportation lanes. Transportation zones reduce the effort needed to
model the geographic network in planning. Grouping locations into transportation zones
reduces the volume of master data in the TM system. Transportation zones can group
locations and can include one-time locations. Transportation zones can include zones within
their locations and sub-zones. For example, all locations that are supplied by the same
warehouse (individual locations and transportation zones) are grouped into a transportation
zone.
If SAP S/4HANA integration through the DRF is used, transportation zones are automatically
created from the address of the location. The location is automatically assigned to the
transportation zone.
Transportation zones are not physical locations and therefore do not have an address.
Transportation zones can also be assigned geographical coordinates. SAP TM offers two
options for calculating these coordinates. After defining the locations, regions, or postal
codes, the system can calculate the coordinates. This estimates the center point of the zone
based on the coordinates of all locations included in the zone. Alternatively, identify the
geographical coordinates and manually enter them in SAP TM.

Figure 18: Planning with Transportation Zones
Transportation Zone Types

● Region: In a regional zone, locations are specified by a country or region. For example, the
state of Illinois can be defined as its own zone. In the figure, the zone US-Illinois is created
and only Illinois is assigned to it.
● Postal Codes: Transportation zones can be defined by the use of postal codes. Companies
can use zip/postal codes or zip/postal code ranges to define these geographical areas.
Most major U.S. truck-load and less-than-truck-load carriers publish their rate structures
and transit time tables based on origin and destination three-digit zip code lanes rather
than city or state level lanes. In these documents, carriers use ranges of three-digit zip
codes, such as 170-173.
● Direct: In a direct assignment, locations are assigned directly to a zone. For example, a
particular customer might be in a zone that has low volumes. By including them in a zone
with a larger geography, you might improve the optimization results.
● Mixed: You can use any combination of these types of transportation zones when defining
a zone. This is a called a mixed zone.

Figure 19: Transportation Zones
Transportation Zone Hierarchy

Organizing transportation zones into transportation zone hierarchies allows you to transfer
the properties of the higher level transportation zone to the locations on lower levels of the
hierarchy. You cannot assign a transportation zone to itself or to a zone already assigned to
the same zone.
Transportation zone hierarchies reduce the amount of master data to be maintained in SAP
TM:
● A zone can be assigned to any number of higher-level zones
● Locations can be assigned to any number of zones
● A zone cannot be assigned to a location
Figure 20: Transportation Zone Hierarchy

Transportation Zone Hierarchy Definition

Transportation zone hierarchies can include locations and transportation zones. To see zone
hierarchy, log into SAP Fiori, then choose Master Data folder → Define Zone Hierarchy.
Figure 21: Transportation Zone Hierarchy (2)
Transportation and Trade Lane

Transportation lanes represent the relationship between two locations, two transportation
zones, or a combination of locations and transportation zones that expresses the direct
approachability of the locations, or of all locations, within the transportation zones for a
specific means of transport (MTr).
Figure 22: Transportation Lane

Using transportation zones as the source, destination, or both, considerably reduces the
amount of transportation lanes to maintain.
A transportation lane points only in one direction. To model the reverse direction, you need to
create another transportation lane.
Trade Lane
A trade lane can have a mode of transport and means of transport. The trade lane defines a
direction for transportation, which is characterized by the orientation, source, and
destination. Possible orientations are: Inbound, Outbound, From, To, Within and Along.
Animation: Trade Lane

For more information on Trade Lane, please view the animation in the lesson
Transportation Network , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
A trade lane is an abstract representation of transport classification. A trade lane instance

does not represent a connection between any transportation network nodes (zone/location,
and so on), it is a context independent classification of any transportation-related activities.
Trade lanes may build up a hierarchy, that is, more generic trade lanes imply more specific
trade lanes (for example: "Within Germany using means of transport Truck" implies "Along
from Frankfurt to Hamburg using means of transport Chilled Truck" and "Within Bavaria using
means of transport Truck for liquids").
Figure 24: Trade Lane
Trade lanes may overlap each other (for example, "From Germany using Airplane" and
"Within Europe using Airplane"). Trade lane hierarchies include transportation zone hierarchy
(for example: "From Germany" implies "From Bavaria", which implies "From Plant_Munich"),
means of transport hierarchy (for example: "Within Germany with Mtr Truck” implies "Within
Germany with Mtr Chilled_Truck") and means of transport – mode of transport relations (for
example: "Within Germany with Mode of Transport Road" implies "Within Germany with Mtr
Chilled_truck").
There is no direct link between trade lane and transportation lane.

Methods of Transportation
Transportation Mode
When all shipping and receiving locations are defined, frame how you intend to ship products
between these locations. The complexity of your shipping scenarios influences how much
detail you need to maintain.
For example, consider whether products are shipped over road, rail, or waterways.
Figure 25: Transportation Mode
The first configuration step in the transportation process is to identify the transportation
modes that can be used to move products. The transportation mode describes the highest-
level transport grouping, for example, road, rail, inland waterway, sea, or air. Each method of
transport is assigned a single transportation mode.
Transportation Mode Categories
SAP transportation mode categories are road, rail, sea, air, postal service, and inland
waterways.
In addition to the transportation mode category, companies can assign a dangerous goods
transport category. This signals that you may have to ship certain chemicals under pressure
and only certain ways of transporting the product are suitable. These categories define the
type of transport to be used. Category 99 (all modes) is used in the U.S. according to
dangerous goods regulation 49 CFR. Customers can use categories 30 - 89 for their own
definition.
The Main Carriage
The transportation mode can be set as the Main Carriage. The reference to the main carriage
indicates that this segment of transportation is the primary segment. When dealing with
export scenarios, you may have the pre-carriage, main carriage, and on-carriage. In a multi-
modal or multi-stage shipment, the main carriage stage contains all of the shipment
documents. It also allows pre- and on-carriage stages to be linked to it.
These transportation modes can be used at a high level to determine incompatibilities.

Figure 26: Means of Transport
Animation: Means of Transport

For more information on Means of Transport, please view the animation in the
lesson Transportation Network , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
When you define the various transportation modes, your company can further define the
transportation process by creating and assigning different means of transport. The means of
transport describes the characteristics of specific vehicle types or classifications that
transport goods, such as a non-refrigerated truck, a refrigerated truck, a 60-foot rail boxcar,
or a bulk container.
Assigning Vehicle Resources to a Means of Transport
The network can be expanded by defining vehicle resources and assigning them to a means of
transport. Vehicle resources in a means of transport have a common set of physical
characteristics that are taken into account during the planning process. These physical
characteristics include the mode of transportation (air, rail, surface, or sea), vehicle capacity,
speed, cost structure, geographic availability, and temperature control. Whether a company-
owned fleet can be used to group vehicles in a means of transport is also a consideration.
Means of transport also allow a company to describe the cost structure and geographical
availability of a class of vehicle.
Means of Transport Settings
There are a number of means of transport settings:
● Transportation mode
● Multi-resource
● Scheduled means of transport
● Own means of transport
● GIS quality

Means of Transport Definition

You can define the means of transport in Customizing for SAP TM.
Choose Transportation Management → Master data → Resources → Define Means of
Transport and Compartment → Define Means of Transport.
Transportation Mode Assignment

Within the means of transport, you can assign a transportation mode. This specifies how a
product is transported, for example, by road, rail, sea, or air. You use the means of transport
to select the vehicle resources that are to execute the transportation.
The standard code assigned to means of transport represents the official representation of
type of transport. The UN/EDIFACT standard uses the following codes:
● 006 - Aircraft
● 011 - Ship
● 031 - Truck
● 038 - Car
The relevant settings are:

● Scheduled means of transport: This defines if a resource is traveling based on a fixed
schedule such as a sailing or rail schedule.
● Own means of transport: This determines if a resource is part of your own fleet or that of
an external provider.
Multi-Resource
Figure 28: Multi Resource
Instead of creating individual resources for a means of transport, you can select the Multi-
Resource checkbox for the means of transport. During planning, the system assumes the
availability of the number of resources you define. If you do not specify a number in this field,
the system assumes that an unlimited number of resources are available. During vehicle
scheduling and pre-processing, the number of resources that you define in this field indicates

the maximum number of parallel freight orders that the system is allowed to create for each
resource.
Duration
Figure 29: Speeds
Duration is one of the key elements to consider when dealing with different means of
transport. This can be influenced by the type of transport as well as the quality or type of
transportation infrastructure used. Selecting the GIS Quality checkbox means your
organization is integrating with a third party geographical information system. This
integration is specific about which routes (interstate highways or county road) are used.
Anticipated speeds for the different types of highways or roads that may be used can be
defined.
Distance and Speed
Figure 30: Distance Factor and Average Speed

If you choose not to integrate with a GIS, you still differentiate durations for different means of
transport. Within each means of transport, you can specify an average speed. The speed is
then used, along with the distance from the transportation lane, to calculate transit duration.
The distance factor establishes the difference between the linear distance between two
locations and the actual distance covered by the vehicle. Based on the linear distance, you
can use this factor to estimate the actual travel distance for a vehicle between two locations.
Together with the average speed, you can estimate the transportation time.
How to Use the Path Finder

Scenario building can be time consuming. Scenario validation, especially for transportation
optimization, is even more time consuming. The planner needs to establish if all elements of
the transportation network are maintained correctly to enable the optimizer to find a valid
solution.
You can use the path finder function to search for legs in your transportation network and
take the following considerations into account during the process:
● Locations
● Transshipment locations
● Transportation lanes
● Schedules
● Transportation zones
The path finder enables you to easily determine whether a connection exists between two
locations and, therefore, whether you have correctly configured your master data. However,
the path finder does not take incompatibilities into consideration.
Path Finder Execution

You can execute the path finder and check the result in either the transportation network
cockpit or on the transportation proposals user interface.
● Transportation Network Cockpit:
When you open the context menu for a location in the transportation network cockpit, you
can choose Find Path To Location and enter a destination in the displayed dialog box. The
system then calculates all of the available connections in the transportation network and
displays them on the map. The color of the connections indicates whether a valid
transportation lane or schedule exists.
● Transportation Proposals:
When you call the user interface for transportation proposals, you can choose the
appropriate button to show or hide the available connections on the map. As in the
transportation network cockpit, the color of the connections indicates whether a valid
transportation lane or schedule exists.
● Explanation Tool:
When you select one or more freight units, you can choose Show Network Path to analyze
the underlying transportation network that is taken into account when planning the
selected freight units.
● Requests

- Source location
- Destination location
● Options
- Determine path
- Determine connections
● Restrictions
- Outbound, inbound, or implicit hub
- Transportation mode
- Means of transport
Path Finder Report: /SCMTMS/FIND_TN_PATH

The required input for the tool is a start and a destination location. Using assigned
transshipment locations and existing connections (transportation lanes, schedules, and
booking), the path finder tries to find all paths. The result indicates if there is a valid
connection or not (all existing are listed) for each stage of a path. It is thus easy to find out if
you have assigned a transshipment location, but if it cannot be reached from your start
location.
The report has some limitations. For example, it is not possible to search within a certain
timeframe and respect the validity of the connections. Also, transportation mode and means-
of-transport filters are not available and incompatibilities are not considered.
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 2
Lesson 3
Transportation Resources
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Resources Overview
Resources play a central role in planning and execution within SAP Transportation
Management. Resource data is relevant to the planning of order dates, taking into account
working times and the available capacities of the resources. Resources, in conjunction with
booking, offer the capacity needed to perform transportation activities on freight units, such
as transportation, loading, and unloading activities.
The following resource types exist:
● Vehicle Resource
● Handling Resource
● Calendar Resource
● Transportation Unit Resource
Goods are loaded onto and unloaded from vehicles and transportation unit resource and
transported around the transportation network. Calendar resources specify operating hours
for a location, during which goods maybe dropped off or picked up from this location.
Handling resources offers handling capacity that allows the goods to be loaded or unloaded
from vehicle resources.
Animation: Transportation Resources

For more information on Transportation Resources, please view the animation in
the lesson Transportation Resources , online in the SAP Learning Hub.

Lesson: Transportation Resources
Figure 32: Transportation Resources
Vehicle Resource
Vehicles are moving resources that transport goods between locations, for example, trucks,
rail-cars, planes, and ships. Each vehicle resource represents a unit load, for example, one
trailer of a certain capacity, one container of a certain capacity, or one rail car of a certain
capacity. Eight dimensions and unit of measurements can be used to define vehicle capacity,
for example, mass, volume – that is, the capacity of a trailer can be specified as 40,000 lb, or
2200 cu ft/s, or 24 pallets. Planning can only take the vehicle capacity into account if these
dimensions and unit of measurement correspond to the dimensions and unit of
measurements that are defined in a freight unit building rule.
Vehicle group and vehicle types specify attributes such as physical properties of a certain
kind of vehicle.
All vehicles are assigned to a means of transport (transportation method). Means of transport
are groups of vehicle resources. The transportation mode is assigned to means of transport.
The transportation mode specifies how the goods are transported, for example, as a sea
shipment.
Animation: Relationship between Vehicle Resource, Means of Transport and

Mode of Transport
For more information on Relationship between Vehicle Resource, Means of
Transport and Mode of Transport , please view the animation in the lesson
Transportation Resources , online in the SAP Learning Hub.

Figure 34: Relationship between Vehicle Resource, Means of Transport and Mode of Transport
There are two types of vehicle resources: passive and active. Active vehicle resources can
travel by themselves. Passive vehicle resources cannot travel by themselves. A truck that has
a motor and can travel by itself is an active resource. An empty trailer with no tractor is a
passive resource.
Animation: Active and Passive Resource

For more information on Active and Passive Resource , please view the animation
in the lesson Transportation Resources , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Figure 36: Active and Passive Resource
The means of transport and factory calendar should be defined before creating a vehicle
resource. When creating a vehicle resource, it is recommended that the following information
is input:
● A resource name
● A calendar and time zone

● A capacity
The following fields combined together define capacity and volume and are mandatory for
creating a resource:
● Factory Calendar
● Continuous Dimension
● Capacity
● Unit of Measure
MTr combinations can be used to model truck and trailer combinations. Multiresources can
be used to model an external fleet in one step.
Compartments
Compartments can be used to indicate a division of the vehicle resource (truck) and also the
trailer into smaller units. Capacity constraints can be specified for compartments.
Furthermore, they offer the following benefits:
● Flexible and fixed compartments
● Incompatibilities can be used to restrict certain freight units from being transported in
certain compartments, for example, because of temperature restrictions
The use of compartments allows you to assign dangerous goods to certain areas of the truck.
In addition, the use of compartments improves transportation planning for oil and gas,
chemical, retail, and consumer products.
Means of Transport Combinations
A means of transport combination is an instance of a particular means of transport, or a
group of identical instances of means of transport, that can provide transportation services.
You use this business object to map the capacity and availability of vehicles that you want to
use for transportation.
MTr combinations have the following attributes:
● They can be used to model a truck and trailer combination.
● You specify the number of the objects of each MTr within the combination, for example, 1
truck and 2 trailers.
● You specify capacities (several UoM): Maximum capacities of the combination.
● Additional (freely definable) attributes can be used for compatibilities and
incompatibilities; based on a customizable attribute definition (code + text).
● Coupling/un-coupling durations are defined per passive MTr.
Handling Resource
Handling resources are used for handling transportation orders at a location. The handling
resource offers handling capacity that allows the goods to be loaded onto and unloaded from
vehicle resource, for example, door, loading ramp, or forklift. Handling resources maintain
downtimes, restrictions on simultaneous activities, resource availability, qualification, and
equipment requirements.
Availability times can be maintained by defining capacity variants and shift sequences.

Consumed capacity per loading and unloading operation is maintained in the location master
data with the assignment of the (means of transport-specific) handling resource. The
available capacity is maintained in the resource master data record.
Calendar Resource
Calendar resources determine the operating hours of locations. Loading and unloading
activities can only take place during operating hours. Calendar resources are defined as
resources and can be assigned to multiple locations as:
● Inbound operating hours
● Outbound operating hours
● Means-of-transport specific operating hours (inbound)
● Means-of-transport specific operating hours (outbound)
Availability times can be maintained by defining capacity variants and shift sequences.
Transportation Unit Resource

For an instance of a particular transportation unit, such as a container, you can use the
transportation unit resource to map the capacity and availability that you want to use for
transportation.
You can choose up to eight dimensions and units of measurement to describe the capacity.
Note that the mass and volume are predefined by default. Planning can only take the
transportation unit resource capacity into account if these correspond to the dimensions and
units of measurement that you define in a freight unit building rule.
The equipment, and equipment group types, specify attributes such as the physical
properties of a certain kind of transportation unit resource. By creating a transportation unit
resource, you can do the following:
● Use the type as a template to create transportation unit resources, copying the attributes
of the type to a new resource.
● Request a special type of transportation unit resource in a forwarding order or in a booking
order.
Transportation Unit Resource
● Master data object to represent individual containers

● Can be created with reference to equipment group type
● Parameters for transportation unit resource resources include the following:
- Capacity
- Minimum number of seals
- Physical properties
- Downtimes
- Grouping attributes
- Alternative names

Unit 2
Exercise 1
Create Resources
Simulation: Create Resources

For more information on Create Resources, please view the simulation in the
lesson Transportation Resources online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. During planning, it is imperative to identify if your organization has
different options to choose from when shipping products between locations. These options
impact the transportation costs and delivery dates based on different transit times. In
Customizing, you create the means of transport to distinguish different ways of moving
product through your network. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to check the appropriate
customizing settings required for transportation planning and subsequently needs to
configure the appropriate resources.
1. In Customizing, view means of transport TM2-FTL.
2. Which Mode of Transport does means of transport TM2-FTL belong to?
3. Which Resource Class does means of transport TM2-FTL belong to?
4. What are the values for speed used for?
5. Create a vehicle resource using the following data:

Field Value
Resource TM2FTL-##
Resource Class Truck
Means of Transport TM2-FTL

Field Value
Time Zone CET
Continuous Dimension Mass
Factory Calendar 01
Capacity 20000
Unit KG
6. Create a second vehicle resource using the following data:

Field Value
Resource TM2LTL-##
Means of Transport TM2-LTL
Time Zone CET
Factory Calendar 01
Capacity 10000
Unit KG
7. Create a calendar resource OPEN9TO5-## to represent opening hours. The opening hours
should be from Monday to Friday, from 9.00am to 5.00pm. For this purpose, you have to
define shifts (see the table Shift Definition), shift sequences (see the table Shift
Sequences) and a capacity variant (see the table Capacity Variant).
Table 1: Calendar Resource

Field Value
Resource OPEN9TO5-##
Time Zone CET
Factory Calendar 01
Table 2: Shift Definition

Field Value
Shift SHIFT-##
Valid to 31.12.9999
Start Time 09:00:00
End Time 17:00:00

Table 3: Shift Sequences

Field Value
Shift Sequence TM2SS-##
Day Number 1
Valid To 31.12.9999
Non Work Days Can start or finish on a non-

workday
Shift 1 Shift-##
Table 4: Capacity Variant

Field Value
Capacity Variant 01
From Beginning of current year
To End of next year
First Day Choose First Day depending on the week-

day of the date maintained in the FROM
field. For example, 1= Monday, 2= Tuesday,
and so on.
Workdays Workdays according to Factory

Calendar
8. Verify that your calendar resource only represents opening hours from 9 to 5 on
weekdays.

Unit 2
Solution 1
Create Resources
Simulation: Create Resources

For more information on Create Resources, please view the simulation in the
lesson Transportation Resources online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. During planning, it is imperative to identify if your organization has
different options to choose from when shipping products between locations. These options
impact the transportation costs and delivery dates based on different transit times. In
Customizing, you create the means of transport to distinguish different ways of moving
product through your network. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to check the appropriate
customizing settings required for transportation planning and subsequently needs to
configure the appropriate resources.
1. In Customizing, view means of transport TM2-FTL.

a) In the backend system, execute transaction SPRO and press F5.
b) In Customizing, choose Transportation Management → Master Data → Resources

→ Means of Transport and Compartment → Define Means of Transport.
c) Double-click on means of transport TM2-FTL.
d) Familiarize yourself with the information required to maintain a means of transport.
2. Which Mode of Transport does means of transport TM2-FTL belong to?
Means of transport TM2-FTL belongs to transportation mode Road. Other available

transportation modes include: Air, Sea, Inland Waterway, Rail, and Postal Service.
3. Which Resource Class does means of transport TM2-FTL belong to?
Means of transport TM2-FTL belongs to resource class Truck. Other available resource
classes include: Trailer, Locomotive, Railcar, Vessel, Airplane.
4. What are the values for speed used for?
The values that you can maintain for speed will be used to calculate approximate
transportation durations based on the geographical distance between locations.
5. Create a vehicle resource using the following data:

Field Value
Resource TM2FTL-##
Time Zone CET
Factory Calendar 01
Capacity 20000
Unit KG
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Define Resource.
b) In the Resource field, enter TM2FTL-##.
c) Choose Create Resources.
d) Enter the data from the table.
e) Save your data.
6. Create a second vehicle resource using the following data:

Field Value
Resource TM2LTL-##
Time Zone CET
Factory Calendar 01
Capacity 10000
Unit KG
b) In the Resource field, enter TM2LTL-##.
d) Enter the data from the table.
e) Save your data.
7. Create a calendar resource OPEN9TO5-## to represent opening hours. The opening hours
should be from Monday to Friday, from 9.00am to 5.00pm. For this purpose, you have to
define shifts (see the table Shift Definition), shift sequences (see the table Shift
Sequences) and a capacity variant (see the table Capacity Variant).

Table 1: Calendar Resource

Field Value
Resource OPEN9TO5-##
Time Zone CET
Factory Calendar 01
Table 2: Shift Definition

Field Value
Shift SHIFT-##
Valid to 31.12.9999
Start Time 09:00:00
End Time 17:00:00
Table 3: Shift Sequences

Field Value
Day Number 1
Valid To 31.12.9999
Non Work Days Can start or finish on a non-

workday
Shift 1 Shift-##
Table 4: Capacity Variant

Field Value
Capacity Variant 01
From Beginning of current year
To End of next year
First Day Choose First Day depending on the week-

day of the date maintained in the FROM
field. For example, 1= Monday, 2= Tuesday,
and so on.
Workdays Workdays according to Factory

Calendar

b) In the Resource field, enter OPEN9TO5-##.
d) Choose the Calendar tab.
e) Enter the data from the table Calendar Resource.
f) Save your data.
g) Choose More → Definitions and select the Shifts tab.
h) Enter the data from the table Shift Definition.
i) Save your data.
j) Create a shift sequence using the Shift Sequences tab. The shifts should repeat every
seven days, but shifts should only be available on days 1 to 5.
k) Select the Shift Sequences tab to create daily windows and enter the data from the
table Shift Sequence.
l) Repeat the previous step k) for 2-7 by replacing the value for Day Number with 2 to 7.
You can also choose Copy. Ensure the day is sequential to the previous entry.
m) Remove the shift entry SHIFT-## from days 6 and 7 of your shift sequence.
n) Save your data.
o) Go back to the Create Resources: Header Data screen.
p) Choose More → Capacity Variants → Interval to create new capacity variants.
q) Enter the data from table Capacity Variant.
r) Choose Continue to accept the data.
s) Save the capacity variant.
t) Go back to the Create Resources: Header Data screen.
u) In the General Data tab, in the Available Capacity screen area, enter the active variant
01.
v) Save your data.
8. Verify that your calendar resource only represents opening hours from 9 to 5 on
weekdays.
b) In the Resource field, enter OPEN9TO5-##.
c) Choose Display Resources.
d) Choose the Time-Cont. Capacity tab.
e) Choose the Capacity List button.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 2
Lesson 4
Schedules and Default Routes
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Route
Default Routes
A default route defines the sequence of stops for a given source/destination location
combination. Default routes can be used in place of transshipment chains with sales orders
and deliveries, forwarding orders, and forwarding quotations. Default routes can be modified
manually where the desired route is different to that proposed by the system.
To see information related to routes, log into SAP Fiori, then choose Master Data
folder → Define default Routes.
Carrier Schedules
Figure 38: Sailing Schedule with Gateway (CFS)

When shipping products via air or ocean, consider that your partners are typically renting
space at a port facility. This facility is used by many parties, and so options for moving
product may be limited.
While the road-based scenario can make use of a variety of transportation lanes due to the
flexibility of the carriers, ocean and air carriers often face more competition and more
regulation. This limits the flexibility for departures and arrivals. From a transportation
planning perspective, the implication is that you may need a more structured and predictable
plan for scheduling purposes. With SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM), your
organization can take advantage of different types of schedules to model specific departure
and arrival rules suited to air and ocean shipping.
Carrier Schedules for Actual Transportation

Carrier schedules represent the actual transportation executed by the schedule vehicle, be it
by plane, vessel, train, or truck. Usually, these schedules involve stopping at locations such as
ports and airports that are used commonly and shared by many different carriers. Flights for
air transportation and vessel voyages for ocean are examples of carrier schedules. Carrier
schedules can also be truck schedules.
Location and time information are relevant to a schedule. For example, the planner asks the
following questions:
● When and from where does the plane depart?
● When do you have to be there to board it?
● When will it arrive?
● Which carrier is responsible for the transportation?
● What can be transported?
Carrier schedules do not just have a start and end destination; they can have multiple stops,
which is common for air transportation. Carrier schedules can be executed by different
carriers on different stages using a connection schedule. It is possible to use a multi-stop
carrier schedule in any sequential location combination, so it is not required to start at the
first and leave at the last location.
Schedules can be created manually in SAP TM and uploaded from an external source. You
can also upload schedules from an external data source to SAP TM by calling function
module /SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_SAVEMULT. This function is available for the sea, air,
and road transportation modes. Alternatively, you can upload schedules for the air
transportation mode in a spreadsheet or CSV format to SAP TM by executing report /
SCMTMS/SCH_UPLOAD. For more information, see the system documentation.
You can delete schedules created manually and uploaded by calling function module /
SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_DELMULTI or by executing report /SCMTMS/SCH_DELETION.

Lesson: Schedules and Default Routes
Schedule Types
Figure 39: Overview of Schedules
SAP TM allows businesses to create different schedule types to handle the multiple shipping
scenarios they may encounter. Schedules can be maintained for each business partner or
carrier, and can identify different loading and unloading points, such as ports and airports.
If you have reappearing transportation traffic in your transportation network scenario, you
can use the schedules functionality. A combination of transportation mode, gateway
customer fact sheets (CFS), direct, and reference fields define the type of schedule.
A gateway schedule includes two gateway locations. In ocean scenarios, the locations could
be the CFS-locations. In air scenarios, they can be the gateway locations.
Gateway Schedules: Subcategories
The following are the subcategories in gateway schedules:
● Direct
The schedule goes from A to B without changing the mode of transport. For example, GW
Nurnberg to GW Hamburg via truck.
● Indirect
The schedule goes from A to B but the mode of transport changes. For example, GW
Hamburg to GW Cape Town via truck and ocean.
Air and Ocean Scenarios: Subcategories

The following are the subcategories in ocean and air scenarios:
● Sailing schedules with vessel information
● Master flight schedules with aircraft information
Carrier schedules describe a sequence of transportation stops where the start location and
the target stop are not gateways. A gateway is a transportation hub where freight is
consolidated and deconsolidated.

Carrier Schedules
● Ocean Carrier Schedule
Use the ocean carrier schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that
are served by a ship. By specifying departure rules, you can generate voyages
automatically.
● Carrier Flight Schedule
Use the carrier flight schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that
are served by a plane. By specifying departure rules, you can generate flights
automatically.
● Road Schedule
Use the road schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are
served by a truck.
Animation: Overview of Schedules

For more information on Overview of Schedules, please view the animation in the
lesson Schedules and Default Routes, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Schedule Capacities
In the schedule type, you can define if the schedule should have the following items assigned
to it:
● Limited capacities
● Transportation costs

Unit 2
Exercise 2
Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier
Schedule
Simulation: Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier Schedule

For more information on Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier Schedule,
please view the simulation in the lesson Schedules and Default Routes online in
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to create a default route and a road carrier schedule to support this
implementation.
1. Create a default route from your shipping point SP_1010 to transportation zone DE-NRW.
The default route should include the hub location TMCD-Hannover with a 4 hour length of
stay. It should be valid for this calendar year and the next calendar year. Use Default Route
Type TM2R.
2. Note down the default route number.
3. Create a new road carrier schedule using schedule type TM2S for carrier TM-CAR-10. The
schedule should be valid for the current month and the following two months. Maintain the
following stop sequence:
Table 5: Standard Stop Sequence

Sequence Location Cargo Cut-Off Transit Duration
(Hours) (Hours)
10 SP_1010 6 6
20 TMAT99-01 0 1
30 TMAT99-02 0 1
40 TMAT99-03 0

Table 6: Schedule Details

Field Value
Description Schedule for User ##
Valid from Beginning of current month

Valid to The end of the month after next month
Carrier TM-CAR-10
Fixed Costs 100
4. Record your schedule number.
5. What is the meaning of the value in the Cargo Cut-Off (offset in days) field?
6. What is the meaning of the value in the Days to Availability field?
7. Create departures from today until the end of the next month for your schedule. The
departures should be each Tuesday and Thursday at 09:30. Create a corresponding
departure rule and generate departures based on this rule.
8. How many departures have been created?
9. What is the departure time at location TMAT99-01? Do you know why?

Unit 2
Solution 2
Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier
Schedule
Simulation: Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier Schedule

For more information on Create a Default Route and a Road Carrier Schedule,
please view the simulation in the lesson Schedules and Default Routes online in
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to create a default route and a road carrier schedule to support this
implementation.
1. Create a default route from your shipping point SP_1010 to transportation zone DE-NRW.
The default route should include the hub location TMCD-Hannover with a 4 hour length of
stay. It should be valid for this calendar year and the next calendar year. Use Default Route
Type TM2R.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Create Default Route.
b) Enter Default Route Type: TM2R.
c) Choose Continue.
d) Enter the data from the following table:
Field Value
Description Default Route for User ##
Valid from Beginning of this calendar year
Valid to End of next calendar year
e) In the Transportation Stops screen area, create three lines by choosing the Create
button three times.
f) Enter the data from the following table:
Sequence Location Transportation Length of Stay

Mode (Hours)
10 SP_1010 01 0

Sequence Location Transportation Length of Stay

Mode (Hours)
20 TMCD-Hannover 01 4
30 DE-NRW
g) Save your data.
2. Note down the default route number.
This varies.
3. Create a new road carrier schedule using schedule type TM2S for carrier TM-CAR-10. The
schedule should be valid for the current month and the following two months. Maintain the
following stop sequence:
Table 5: Standard Stop Sequence

Sequence Location Cargo Cut-Off Transit Duration
(Hours) (Hours)
10 SP_1010 6 6
20 TMAT99-01 0 1
30 TMAT99-02 0 1
40 TMAT99-03 0
Table 6: Schedule Details

Field Value
Description Schedule for User ##
Valid from Beginning of current month

Valid to The end of the month after next month
Carrier TM-CAR-10
Fixed Costs 100
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Create Schedule.
b) Enter Schedule Type: TM2S.
c) Choose Continue.
d) Enter the data in the Schedule Details table.
e) In the Standard Stop Sequence screen area, choose Create four times to create four
lines.
f) Insert the data from the table Standard Stop Sequence.

Lesson: Schedules and Default Routes
g) Save your data.
4. Record your schedule number.
This varies.
5. What is the meaning of the value in the Cargo Cut-Off (offset in days) field?
This is the time that the cargo needs to arrive at the departure location prior to the
departure of the truck.
6. What is the meaning of the value in the Days to Availability field?
This is the time that the cargo is available after the truck has reached the location.
7. Create departures from today until the end of the next month for your schedule. The
departures should be each Tuesday and Thursday at 09:30. Create a corresponding
departure rule and generate departures based on this rule.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Edit Schedule.
b) In the Schedule field, enter the schedule number from the schedule that you have
created in the previous step.
c) Choose Continue.
d) In the Departures screen area, on the Departure Rules tab, choose Create.
e) In the row containing the stage SP_1010 to TMAT99-01, select the checkboxes for
Tuesday and Thursday.
f) In the row containing the stage SP_1010 to TMAT99-01, enter the departure time
09:30.
g) Select the row containing rule 1, SP_1010 to TMAT99-03.
h) Choose Generate Departures → For Specific Time Period.
i) In the dialog box, enter the start date as today's date and the end date as the end of
next month.
j) Choose Generate Departures.
k) Save your data.
8. How many departures have been created?
The number varies.
9. What is the departure time at location TMAT99-01? Do you know why?
The departure time at TMAT99-01 is 15:30. It is 6 hours after the departure from SP_1010.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 2
Learning Assessment
1. Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the functions of particular
partners in the sales process. Each partner can have only one function.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X True
X False
2. When you create transportation zones, it reduces the amount of master data in the
system by grouping locations together. Which of the following are examples of
transportation zones?
X A Regional Zones
X B Postal Code Zones
X C Country Zones
X D City Zones
X E Island Zones
3. You cannot assign a transportation zone to itself or to a zone already assigned to the same
zone.
X True
X False

4. Which of the following vehicle resource attributes are considered for planning?
X A Capacity
X B Means of transport
X C Time zone
X D Fuel economy
X E Fuel type
5. When can loading and unloading activities take place?

Choose the correct answer.
X A Loading and unloading activities can take place outside operating hour when
planned in advance.
X B Loading and unloading activities can only take place during operating hours.
X C Loading and unloading activities can take place only before 08.00 hours.
X D Loading and unloading activities can take place regardless of the operating hours
defined by calendar resources.
6. What is the minimum number of locations required to define a carrier schedule?

X A 1
X B 2
X C 3
X D 4

UNIT 3 Creation of Transportation
Requirements
Lesson 1
Defining Transportation Relevance for Orders and Deliveries 65
Lesson 2
Creating Freight Units 69
Exercise 3: Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit Building Rules 77
Exercise 4: Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders 85
Lesson 3
Conditions and Incompatibilities 93
Lesson 4
Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries 100
Exercise 5: Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery Creation 105
Lesson 5
Building Packages 110
Exercise 6: Configure Package Building and Create Packages based on Sales Orders 119
Lesson 6
Understanding Change Controller 128
Exercise 7: Explore Change Controller Strategies 133
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Define transportation relevance

● Explain freight units and freight unit building rule
● Understand the concept of conditions and incompatibilities
● Understand how to process deliveries
● Build packages
● Explain change controller

Unit 3: Creation of Transportation Requirements

Unit 3
Lesson 1
Defining Transportation Relevance for Orders
and Deliveries
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Transportation Requirements
The initial event that triggers the transportation management process is a transportation
requirement. Based on the deployment option used for SAP TM, the following are the
transportation requirement starting points:
● Logistics Service Providers (LSPs or 3PLs)
● The side-by-side deployment / external TM system integration
● The embedded deployment / internal TM component integration
Figure 42: Transportation Requirements

Animation: Transportation Requirements

For more information on Transportation Requirements , please view the
animation in the lesson Defining Transportation Relevance for Orders and
Deliveries, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Logistics Service Providers (LSPs or 3PLs)

Logistics service providers (LSPs or 3PLs) can also receive transportation requirements. For
LSPs, the forwarding orders are created in one of two ways – manually, using the SAP TM UI,
or through integration with an external system via electronic data interchange (EDI).
In an LSP process, the following documents act as transportation requirements:
● Forwarding orders
● Forwarding quotation
The Side-by-Side Deployment / External TM System Integration

In side-by-side deployment scenarios, SAP TM is installed as a separate system and the
original document causing the transportation demand is not present in SAP TM. Therefore, a
replication of this information to the SAP TM system must take place. This replication can
either create order-based transportation requirements or delivery-based transportation
requirements. Order-based transportation requirements may be created from a sales order, a
purchase order, a stock transport order (STO), or a scheduling agreement. Delivery-based
transportation requirements may be created from an outbound or inbound delivery.
Integration between SAP TM and the source system (SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA) is
accomplished using XML messages via SAP Process Integration, or a point-to-point
communication.
The Embedded Deployment/ Internal TM Component

In the embedded deployment scenario, a separate document representing a transportation
requirement is not required, since the original object causing the transportation demand is
already present in the SAP S/4HANA system itself. This can be order documents like sales
orders, purchase orders, stock transport orders, scheduling agreements, or delivery
documents like inbound or outbound deliveries. In this deployment scenario, the freight unit is
the starting object for SAP TM and the freight unit is created directly from the original object
causing the transportation demand. The embedded scenario is the primary focus of this
overview training.
Business Functions
The following business functions have to be activated for integrating the SAP TM functionality
within the SAP S/4HANA system:
● LOG_TM_ORD_INT
● LOG_TM_ORD_INT_II
● LOG_TM_ORD_INT_III
● LOG_TM_ORD_INT_IV
● LOG_TM_IV_INT
● SD_01

Lesson: Defining Transportation Relevance for Orders and Deliveries
● OPS_ADVRETURNS_1
Logistics Integration
The following documents can trigger an SAP TM process, either through internal SAP TM
component integration or via external SAP TM system integration:
● Sales orders
● Customer returns
● Purchase orders
● Stock transport order
● Returns stock transport order
● Sales scheduling agreement
● MM Scheduling agreement
● Outbound deliveries
● Inbound deliveries
The following configuration steps enable freight order creation from SD/ MM documents:
● Activate Integration of documents via control key
● Create logistics integration profile
● Assign logistics integration profile to document type
Figure 44: Logistics Integration Configuration Steps

Animation: Logistics Integration Configuration Steps

For more information on Logistics Integration Configuration Steps, please view
the animation in the lesson Defining Transportation Relevance for Orders and
Deliveries, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 3
Lesson 2
Creating Freight Units
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Freight Unit
The freight unit is the smallest unit that can be transported. The predecessor document data
and the freight unit building rules form the basis for building freight units. You define the most
important settings for the freight unit in the freight unit type.
Predecessor documents can be forwarding orders, sales order, delivery, order-based
transportation requirements, or delivery-based transportation requirements. For embedded
TM deployment, the sales order or forwarding order will be the predecessor document. For
side-by-side deployment, OTR/DTR and forwarding orders will be the predecessor
documents.
Figure 46: Freight Unit Predecessor Documents

Animation: Freight Unit Predecessor Documents

For more information on Freight Unit Predecessor Documents, please view the
animation in the lesson Creating Freight Units, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
An N:N relationship is possible between the freight unit and its predecessor documents. The
figure below is applicable for the embedded environment. The same applies for the side-by-
side scenario. Freight units can be further deleted, split, merged based on settings defined in
the freight unit type customization.
Figure 48: Freight Unit and Predecessor Document Relationship Model
Figure 49: Freight Unit Type

Lesson: Creating Freight Units
Animation: Freight Unit Type

For more information on Freight Unit Type , please view the animation in the
lesson Creating Freight Units, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
The following are the configuration settings for freight unit type:
Change Controller Settings: You can assign several different settings related to the change
controller. These settings impact how TM responds to changes made to the freight unit and
freight order.
Additional Strategies: There are a number of additional strategies:
● Creation Strategy: Specifies tasks that the change controller is to perform when creating a
freight order, freight booking, and freight unit.
● Save Strategy: Specifies tasks the change controller is to perform when saving a freight
order, freight booking, and freight unit.
● Delete Strategy: Specifies tasks that the change controller is to perform when a freight
order, freight booking, or freight unit is deleted or canceled.
Execution Settings: There are a number of execution settings:

● Execution Track Relevance: Indicator for controlling the tracking of documents. To track
certain types of documents, choose 2 (Execution Tracking) or 3 (Execution Tracking with
External Event Management). The system sets the initial document execution status to
Not Started. If you do not want to track certain types of documents, choose 1 (No
Execution Tracking). The system then sets the initial document execution status to Not
Relevant.
● Immediate Processing checkbox.
Planning Settings:
● Planning profile: Planning profile can be assigned to freight unit type for freight order
planning.
● Rule for pick up/ delivery windows: Time windows can be specified for pick up and delivery
of goods. If condition is not defined then rule is considered.
● Condition for pickup and window determination window: Condition /SCMTMS/
TOR_TIMEWIND can be assigned to the freight unit type based on this condition. The
following four dates and times for pickup and delivery are calculated for source and
destination based on information derived from the sales order, forwarding quotation, OTR,
DTR:
- Acceptable start date and time
- Requested start date and time
- Requested end date and time
- Acceptable end date and time

Animation: Pickup and Delivery Window

For more information on Pickup and Delivery Window , please view the animation
in the lesson Creating Freight Units, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Figure 52: Pickup and Delivery Window
Event Management Settings:

● Application Object Type: Type of application object to be tracked on the application
system necessary for determining event management relevance for an application object.
The event manager only processes event messages for these objects.
● Last Expected Event for Execution of a Document: Last expected event for a document, for
example, the unexpected event Unload End.
Default MTr Definition Settings:

● Default MTr for Type: Indicate the default means of transport type
● Condition for Default MTr
Default Units of Measure:

● Weight
● Volume
Direct Shipment Options:

● Direct Shipment Option Type: There are three standard options which include no
determination of direct shipment options, automatic determination of direct shipment
options, and manual determination of direct shipment options.

● Carrier Selection Settings: Indicates carrier selection settings that are used for the
determination of direct shipment options.
● Carrier Selection Conditions: Specifies the condition that the system uses to determine
carrier selection settings for direct shipment processes at run-time.
● Direct Shipment Strategy: Specifies the process controller strategy that can be used to
determine the direct shipment options for a freight unit.
Freight Order Determination:

● Freight Order Type: Default freight order type for direct shipment.
● Freight Order Type Condition: Condition can be created to decide which freight order type
is used for direct shipment.
Organizational Unit Determination:

● Default Org Unit: Execution Organization, Purchasing Organization, Execution Group,
Purchase Group. These are the organization numbers that are created in Organizational
Structures.
● Consider Organization Unit of User checkbox: Considers the organizational unit assigned
to the user that creates the freight unit in the determination of the organizational unit
responsible for the freight unit.
● Condition of Determination Rules: Conditions can be created to effect the organizational
unit determination.
Additional Settings:
● Track Changes checkbox: Select this box if changes are to be tracked.
Freight Unit Building Rule

Freight unit building rules define how freight units are built. The system determines which
freight unit building rule will be taken into account for the business document during planning.
The following are the three freight unit building rule determination options:
1. The system checks the condition defined in the logistics integration profile. If there is no
condition or the condition cannot determine a result, the system moves to the second
option.
2. The system checks if a freight unit building rule has been maintained in the logistics
integration profile. If no freight unit building rule is maintained, the system moves to the
third option.
3. The system applies standard settings.

Figure 53: Freight Unit Split Reasons
Animation: Freight Unit Split Reasons

For more information on Freight Unit Split Reasons , please view the animation in
the lesson Creating Freight Units, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
When creating freight units, the system first groups all delivery items within the following
parameters:
● Hard constraints for source / destination location and pick-up / delivery dates
● Business document attributes and packaging information
● Incompatibilities
Freight units are created automatically if transportation-relevance is determined for the

transportation demand (sales order, purchase order, delivery, forwarding order, OTR, DTR).
The system considers freight units that already exist for the transportation demand. It creates
freight units depending on the split quantity and the checkbox for the item split allowed. The
system considers these entries when creating multiple freight units. You can use strategies to
create freight units in accordance with your own requirements. SAP delivers the standard
strategy FUB_AUTO for freight unit building.

Figure 55: Freight Unit Building Rule
Animation: Freight Unit Building Rule

For more information on Freight Unit Building Rule , please view the animation in
the lesson Creating Freight Units, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Within the freight unit building rule, you must specify the critical quantity. This parameter
defines the primary unit of measure that allows a line item on a transport requirement to be
split into multiple freight units. Besides that, several planning quantities can be defined, for
example, weight and volume. Every planning quantity is considered for capacity checks of
resources during transportation planning, and every planning quantity is copied to the freight
unit.
The split quantities define the maximum capacity of a freight unit. The system calculates the
freight unit as a multiple of the rounding quantity. If Item Split Allowed is selected, the freight
unit splits the item while it is being built, if it is over the split quantity. The process controller
strategy allows you to use strategies to define the way in which freight units are created, in
accordance with your requirements. If you maintain an equipment type in the freight unit
building rule, the capacity of the equipment is considered during freight unit building and the
items consolidated into one freight unit are loaded into the equipment.
If necessary, companies can define that the freight units are split if certain constraints are
present. For example, you define the maximum capacity of a freight unit using the split
quantity. Let's say you have to transport 5 tons of cement, but you can only transport it in
batches of 500 kg. In this case, you define a split quantity of 500 kg and the system generates
10 freight units.
Based on the definition of freight units, all items included in a freight order are transported
together from their source to their final destination. However, in multi-modal scenarios,
different planners may be involved in scheduling the different stages of the transport. For this
reason, stage information can be added to the freight unit. This allows a degree of
independence when scheduling the stages.
Using the process controller, freight unit building can be adjusted to customer-specific
requirements using ABAP coding.

Freight Unit Building Rule
Figure 57: FUBR Strategy
Animation: FUBR Strategy

For more information on FUBR Strategy, please view the animation in the lesson
Creating Freight Units, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Consolidate Per Item

One freight unit building rule strategy is to consolidate per item. This strategy creates
separate freight units for each item in the transportation requirement.
Consolidate per Request (Compatible Parts)

Another freight unit building rule strategy is to consolidate per request for compatible parts.
The system groups all the items of a business to form a freight unit. It is assumed that
compatibility rules are used to group similar items.
Consolidate as Much as Possible

Another freight unit building rule strategy is to consolidate as much as possible. This strategy
can only be used with interactive FU creation via a batch report. It consolidates several
transportation requirements into one freight unit, if there are no other reasons for a split.

Unit 3
Exercise 3
Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit
Building Rules
Simulation: Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit Building Rules
For more information on Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit Building
Rules, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating Freight Units online in
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to define freight unit types and apply
freight unit building rules required for transportation planning.
Note:
Always replace ## with the two-digit number assigned to you by your instructor.
1. Review the number ranges used in freight order management in Customizing for SAP TM.
(In SAP TM, the freight unit is a view of the transportation order. The number range for
freight unit and freight orders is maintained as one object.)
2. Create a freight unit type FU##. The freight unit type should have the following attributes:
Field Value
Freight Unit Type FU##
Description Freight Unit Type ##
Time for Drawing Draw number when saving document
Number Range Interval 01
Documents can be deleted Enabled

Cond. for PU/DLV Window Determination FU_TIMEWIND_S4TM2
Execution Track Relevance Execution Tracking with External

Event Management
Last Expected Event UNLOAD_END
Immediate Processing Enabled

Text Schema ERP_DFLT

Field Value
Purchasing Organisation 50000721
Change Controller Strategy DEF_CHACO
Direct Shipment Option Type No Determination of Direct Ship-

ment Options
Web Dynpro Application Configuration /SCMTMS/FRE_UNIT
3. What is the purpose of the Cond. for PU/DLV Window Determination?
4. What is the purpose of the Change Controller Strategy?
5. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-DR-##. The freight unit building rule should use
process controller strategy FUB_AUTO and create freight units of type FUT2. Item splits
should be allowed and default routes should be applied. In addition, use the following data:
Table 7: General Settings

Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-DR-##
Description FUBR User ## with Def. Routes
Document Type FUT2
Freight Unit Building Strategy Consolidate per Request (Compatible

Parts)
Critical Quantity Gross Weight
Item Split Allowed Enabled
Apply Default Route Enabled
Table 8: Advanced Settings

Field Value
Process Controller Strategy FUB_AUTO

Table 9: Planning Quantities

Planning Quantity Unit of Measure for Split Quantity Rounding Quantity
for Freight Unit Split Quantity
Building
Gross Weight KG 20000
Gross Volume M3 80
6. What is the purpose of the Apply Default Route checkbox?
7. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-TM-##. The freight unit building rule should use
process controller strategy FUB_AUTO and create freight units of type FU##. Item splits
should be allowed and default routes should NOT be applied. In addition, use the following
data:

Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-TM-##
Document Type FU##

Parts)
Apply Default Route Disabled

Field Value

Building
Gross Volume M3 80

8. What is the purpose of the Split Quantity?

Unit 3
Solution 3
Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit
Building Rules
Simulation: Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit Building Rules
For more information on Create Freight Unit Types and Freight Unit Building
Rules, please view the simulation in the lesson Creating Freight Units online in
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to define freight unit types and apply
freight unit building rules required for transportation planning.
Note:
1. Review the number ranges used in freight order management in Customizing for SAP TM.
(In SAP TM, the freight unit is a view of the transportation order. The number range for
freight unit and freight orders is maintained as one object.)
b) In Customizing, choose Transportation Management → Freight Order Management

→ Define Number Range Intervals for Freight Order Management.
c) Choose (Display Intervals).
d) Explore the intervals defined. You can assign any of the intervals to a freight unit type.
Note the number ranges assigned and how a number range is assigned in the next
step.
e) Exit the activity.
2. Create a freight unit type FU##. The freight unit type should have the following attributes:
Field Value
Freight Unit Type FU##
Description Freight Unit Type ##

Field Value
Documents can be deleted Enabled
Cond. for PU/DLV Window Determination FU_TIMEWIND_S4TM2
Execution Track Relevance Execution Tracking with External

Event Management
Last Expected Event UNLOAD_END
Immediate Processing Enabled

Text Schema ERP_DFLT
Purchasing Organisation 50000721
Change Controller Strategy DEF_CHACO
Direct Shipment Option Type No Determination of Direct Ship-

ment Options
Web Dynpro Application Configuration /SCMTMS/FRE_UNIT
b) In Customizing, choose Transportation Management → Planning → Freight Unit →

Define Freight Unit Types.
c) Execute the specified Customizing activity.
d) Choose New Entries.
e) Enter the data from the table and save your work.
f) Exit the Customizing activity.
3. What is the purpose of the Cond. for PU/DLV Window Determination?
The condition for pick up/delivery time window determination allows you to define and
control how early and/or late you have to pick up or deliver the freight unit.
4. What is the purpose of the Change Controller Strategy?
The system processes a change controller strategy if a business document has been
changed. The change controller strategy specifies how the change controller is to react to
these changes.
5. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-DR-##. The freight unit building rule should use
should be allowed and default routes should be applied. In addition, use the following data:

Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-DR-##

Field Value
Document Type FUT2

Parts)
Apply Default Route Enabled

Field Value

Building
Gross Volume M3 80
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Freight Unit Building
Rule.
b) Select the General Data tab.
c) Enter the data from the table General Settings.
d) Select the Advanced Settings tab.
e) Enter the data from the table Advanced Settings.
f) Select the Planning Quantities tab.
g) Enter the data from the table Planning Quantities.
h) Save your new freight unit building rule.
6. What is the purpose of the Apply Default Route checkbox?
If you select this checkbox, the system automatically applies the default route when
creating freight units.
7. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-TM-##. The freight unit building rule should use
process controller strategy FUB_AUTO and create freight units of type FU##. Item splits
should be allowed and default routes should NOT be applied. In addition, use the following
data:


Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-TM-##
Document Type FU##

Parts)

Field Value

Building
Gross Volume M3 80
Rule.
8. What is the purpose of the Split Quantity?
The split quantity allows you to control the maximum size of a freight unit.

Unit 3
Exercise 4
Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders
Simulation: Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders

For more information on Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders, please view
the simulation in the lesson Creating Freight Units online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
You are a consultant and want to show your customer how to work with the transportation
functionality in SAP S/4HANA. For this purpose, you create two sales orders to show how
freight units get created based on different logic.
Note:
In this exercise, when you see ##, replace the characters with the two-digit
number (01 to 30) assigned to you by your instructor.
1. Create a sales order for customer TM2G##-01 with order type ZTM2. Use the following
organizational data:
● Sales Organization: 1010
● Distribution Channel: 10
● Division: 00
You want to sell 1 PC of material TM-MAT-01 and the customer reference is DR-##.
Note down the order number of your Sales Order.
2. Create a second sales order for customer TM2G##-01 with order type ZTM2. Use the
following organizational data:
● Division: 00
You want to sell 2 PC of material TM-MAT-01 and the customer reference is TM-##.
3. Check whether freight units have been created for your sales orders by filtering the All
Order-Based Freight Units query for your customer TM2G##-01.

4. How many freight units have been created for each sales order?
5. Which document type (freight unit type) is used?
6. Which freight unit building rule was used for your first sales order?
7. How many stages have been created for this freight unit?
8. What are the predecessor documents of this freight unit?
9. How many stages have been created for the freight unit of your second sales order?

Unit 3
Solution 4
Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders
Simulation: Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders

For more information on Create Freight Units Based on Sales Orders, please view
the simulation in the lesson Creating Freight Units online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
You are a consultant and want to show your customer how to work with the transportation
functionality in SAP S/4HANA. For this purpose, you create two sales orders to show how
freight units get created based on different logic.
Note:
● Division: 00
You want to sell 1 PC of material TM-MAT-01 and the customer reference is DR-##.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Sales Documents → Create Sales Orders.
b) Enter the following information:
● Order Type: ZTM2
● Division: 00
c) Choose Continue.
d) Enter the following data:

● Sold-to-Party: TM2G##-01
● Customer Reference: DR-##
● Material: TM-MAT-01
● Order Quantity: 1
e) Choose Save.
f) Note down the order number of your Sales Order.
2. Create a second sales order for customer TM2G##-01 with order type ZTM2. Use the
following organizational data:
● Division: 00
● Division: 00
c) Choose Continue.
● Customer Reference: TM-##
e) Choose Save.
3. Check whether freight units have been created for your sales orders by filtering the All
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Logistics Integration → Order Integration (Worklist).
b) Select query Freight Units → All Order-Based Freight Units.
c) Click on the column header for Destination Location and select (User Defined Filter).

d) In the pop-up window, enter your customer TM2G##-01 and choose OK.
e) If your sales orders do not show, choose Refresh.
4. How many freight units have been created for each sales order?
For each sales order, one freight unit has been created.
5. Which document type (freight unit type) is used?
For your first sales order, freight unit type FUT2 is used, whereas for your second sales
order, freight unit type FU## is used.
6. Which freight unit building rule was used for your first sales order?
FUBR-DR-##
a) Click on the freight unit number (Document column) for your first sales order. It is the
one with the entry DR-## in the Customer PO Number column.
b) Navigate to the General Data tab.
c) You will find the freight unit building rule FUBR-DR-## referenced here.
7. How many stages have been created for this freight unit?
Two stages.
a) Navigate to the Stages tab.
b) You will find that two stages have been created.
8. What are the predecessor documents of this freight unit?
Your sales order from step 1 is the predecessor document of this freight unit.
a) Navigate to the Document Flow tab.
b) You will find that your sales order is the predecessor document of this freight unit.
9. How many stages have been created for the freight unit of your second sales order?
One stage.

f) Click on the freight unit number (Document column) for your second sales order. It is
the one with the entry TM-## in the Customer PO Number column.
g) Navigate to the Stages tab.
h) You will find that one stage have been created.

LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 3
Lesson 3
Conditions and Incompatibilities
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Conditions
BRFplus (Business Rules Framework plus) is a powerful rules based engine, and is used by
TM conditions. TM Conditions empower users to process complex business rules and it
reduces the need to develop, customize and configure. Conditions are used as filters for
automatic decision making. A condition maps input values to output values. For example,
determination of product type, determination of resource type, determination of execution
organization.
Figure 61: Condition Concept
Animation: Condition Concept

For more information on Condition Concept, please view the animation in the
lesson Conditions and Incompatibilities , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
There are different types of conditions for different areas. For example, document type
determination, order type determination, loading and unloading durations, incompatibilities,
printing, approvals, tolerances, and any customer-specific rule(s).

Figure 63: Condition Types
● Condition type: First, you define the condition type and specify the origin. Specify the
condition type, the fields against which you are testing, and how you want to store the test
results when creating a condition. This is referred to as the origin of the condition. The
system provides the following three options for the origin of condition:
- Direct business object access: The Direct Business Object Access condition returns
directly the value determined by the data access definition. There is no evaluation of the
data.
- BRF+ Decision Table : The BRFplus Decision Table condition takes the input of the data
access definition and evaluates it in a table. This condition table can be maintained from
the condition user interface. This origin of condition is most commonly used by TM
users.
- BRF+ Expression: The BRFplus Expression is a logical expression.
Figure 64: Condition Origin

Lesson: Conditions and Incompatibilities
Animation: Condition Origin

For more information on Condition Origin , please view the animation in the
lesson Conditions and Incompatibilities , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
● Input values: Input values originate in the fields of business objects (direct business object
access) or user-specific fields (data crawler), or values determined in external
determination classes. The available input values depend on the condition type chosen.
The condition type defines the area in which the system is to take the condition into
account. There are various input values and they are determined by the following factors:
- Direct Business Object Access
- Data Crawler
- Determination Class
● Output values: The output of a condition may comprise several output values, all derived
from the input values based on decision making. The output values are determined by the
condition type. For example, the FUB rule is a result of FUB rule determination.
● BRFplus decision table: The system creates a condition based on BRFplus expressions.
The system then processes this table from top to bottom during determination. As soon as
the system finds a row in the BRFplus decision table whose input values match the current
input values, it copies the corresponding output values and processes them in the area
that made the call.
Figure 66: Decision Table Condition Example
Conditions are tests performed against various objects, such as transportation requirements
or freight units, to determine whether a situation is true or false. For example, to decide if
products on a single transportation requirement can be shipped together, each item on the
OTR is checked for certain parameters. If a certain parameter is found, rules are built to
determine where consolidation can take place. If an incompatibility exists, more than one
shipment is necessary.
If you need additional fields for the condition types to be delivered as standard, or if you want
to use customer condition types, create new data access definitions and extend the
assignments in Customizing. You can also change or add to the data access definitions used

by default. The condition type must be identified when defining a condition in SAP TM. A
condition type is a configurable object that is based on field contents stored in various
business object nodes. Each condition type is assigned to a business object (structure) and
the node name (at the header or item level).
When defining a condition type, you can identify when a result is found, if it is stored in a
structure, and if one or more conditions may exist for this condition type. Condition types are
then assigned to data access definitions. These objects specify what fields and in what
sequence users can define specific condition records.
Incompatibility
During transportation planning, companies prepare a set of guidelines regarding shipping. For
example, if a shipper has products that need to be transported via a refrigerated container,
they cannot ship those products with frozen freight units. While planning transportation
shipments, companies define rules regarding how they consolidate loads into a single freight
order. There are many factors other than capacity that impact how freight orders are built. In
SAP TM, these rules are called incompatibilities. This data defines the relevant parameters
controlling when it is and is not appropriate to consolidate loads.
In the figure, a company has a variety of products to ship. The temperature at which items
must be stored during transit is the attribute that signals if items can be consolidated. A test
is executed to decide the temperature in which each product is shipped. A rule states that
items classified as chilled cannot be shipped with items classified as frozen. This could lead to
damage or spoilage if a product is shipped at the wrong temperature.
Incompatibilities are used in combination with conditions to influence the results in SAP TM
during freight unit building, transportation planning, transportation proposals, and carrier
selection. Incompatibilities are important when defining requirements for load building. For
example, freight units with different incoterms must not be transported together.
Refrigerated goods need to be transported in an appropriate means of transport. Certain
means of transport cannot be loaded at a specific location because the location does not have
a suitable loading ramp.
Figure 67: Incompatibility Example: Product (FU) and Vehicle Resource
When creating an incompatibility definition, you must specify a validity area. Validity areas are
comprised of an incompatibility area and an incompatibility type.

Incompatibility areas define where an incompatibility can be used. Four incompatibility areas
exist in TM: Vehicle scheduling and routing planning, Freight unit building, Carrier selection,
Delivery proposals.
Incompatibility Types: Incompatibility types are delivered by SAP and define the objects that
are the focus of the rule being enforced. The following list contains examples of
incompatibility types: Freight unit - Freight unit, Freight unit - Vehicle, Freight unit -
Transshipment location, Carrier - Transportation Order.
In addition to the validity area, the incompatibility definition can determine how the rule is
enforced in both manual and automatic planning by defining the reaction, for example,
incompatibility is ignored, warning if ignored, must not be violated.
Incompatibilities can be defined between two attributes of two business objects. This requires
that two conditions are defined and relevant results are specified. Two business objects are
then incompatible if the result of the conditions matches the relevant results.
Figure 68: Incompatibility Definition
Animation: Incompatibility Definition

For more information on Incompatibility Definition , please view the animation in
the lesson Conditions and Incompatibilities , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Setting the Identical Values Only checkbox in the incompatibility definition allows for an
incompatibility to be defined between two instances of the same business object, for
example, two freight units. In this case, a single condition is defined in the incompatibility
definition. The two business object instances are then only incompatible if their values differ.

Figure 70: Incompatibility Identical Values and Violations
Figure 71: Incompatibility Validity
Incompatibility Settings: Incompatibility settings can be maintained in planning profiles,

carrier selection settings, delivery profiles, and the freight unit building rule. Transportation
planning profiles specify when the system allows incompatibilities to be violated during
manual planning, in VSR optimization, or in background processing. Incompatibility settings
are assigned within these profiles. The incompatibility settings group together several
incompatibility definitions that may apply to a planning run. Only incompatibilities for the
same incompatibility area can be combined.

Figure 72: Incompatibility Settings and its Assignment
Animation: Incompatibility Settings and its Assignment

For more information on Incompatibility Settings and its Assignment , please
view the animation in the lesson Conditions and Incompatibilities , online in the
SAP Learning Hub.
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 3
Lesson 4
Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Delivery Overview
The decision about whether to start the process in TM with either the order or the delivery
depends on the customer requirements and guidelines concerning transportation planning
and execution. If shipping activities other than transportation planning are involved prior to
the transportation process, the process based on the delivery is more likely to be used. If
goods are sold with all shipping activities considered, the order will be the basis for
transportation planning.
There is no difference in the continuation of the process between transportation
requirements based on an order and those based on deliveries. As shown in the figure, both
documents are capable of triggering the entire process.
Figure 74: Integration Options
The following integration scenarios can be set up:

● Order Integration with delivery proposals

Lesson: Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries
● Delivery Integration without delivery proposals
Figure 75: Integration Scenarios
Animation: Integration Scenarios

For more information on Integration Scenarios, please view the animation in the
lesson Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Order Integration with Delivery Proposal

If the TM component is leading the transportation process, you will set up the integration
scenario Order Integration with Delivery Proposal. The order is created in SD/MM and then
integrated into the TM component. Freight units are created in TM automatically. After freight
units on freight orders, the delivery date can be known. This information is relayed back to
SD/MM, where delivery documents are created.
Delivery proposals are used to propagate planning information from TM to SD/MM. Deliveries
are created in SD/MM. This process is called Delivery Proposal because TM is proposing the
creation of deliveries. SD/MM decides how the delivery should be created.

Figure 77: Order Integration with Delivery Proposal
Animation: Order Integration with Delivery Proposal

For more information on Order Integration with Delivery Proposal, please view
the animation in the lesson Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries , online in the
SAP Learning Hub.
SAP TM considers data for delivery creation from the order and from the assigned freight
units, freight orders, and freight bookings. Based on the chosen input, SAP TM creates
delivery proposals. A proposal consists of groups of freight units that can be delivered
together.
● Dates: TM uses dates from the freight order or freight booking. If the freight unit is not
planned, that is, no freight order or freight booking exists, then SAP TM uses dates from
the freight units.
● Quantities: TM uses quantities from freight units.
● SD/MM Document References: TM retrieves document references (such as order
document number) from the order / order-based transportation requirement.
Delivery profiles define how delivery proposals should be created. Although the delivery
profile is optional, it makes sense to create a profile to reuse the same settings every time you
want to create delivery proposals. The settings you can define here concern how and if freight
units can be consolidated into one delivery proposal and which freight units may not be
consolidated.
To see information related to delivery profiles, log into SAP Fiori, then choose Profiles and
Settings → Create delivery profile.
You can define how the delivery proposals should be created (for example, one proposal per
item, one proposal per freight unit, and so on). One option of the delivery profile is to “fix” the
planning result for freight units and freight orders. Fixing the planning means after the
planning results are transferred via the delivery proposals, they can no longer be changed in

SAP TM. Incompatibilities in delivery profiles can be used to prevent certain freight units or
items from being consolidated into one delivery proposal.
After the delivery proposals have been sent, deliveries are created. SAP TM receives
information about the status of the delivery creation.
Delivery Integration Without Delivery Proposals

If the SD/MM component is the leading system for delivery creation and item order
consolidation, you will set up the integration scenario Delivery Integration without Delivery
Proposal. In this case, the order would not trigger the transportation management process
and thus the freight unit creation. Only after the delivery is created for the order should freight
units be created. These freight units now better represent the splits and consolidations that
have been done previously in SD or MM. Planning can now start, although the planning results
do not affect the delivery dates of the delivery anymore. Dates in the freight unit are
considered as hard constraints during planning.
Figure 79: Delivery Integration Without Delivery Proposal
Animation: Delivery Integration Without Delivery Proposal

For more information on Delivery Integration Without Delivery Proposal , please
view the animation in the lesson Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries , online
in the SAP Learning Hub.


Unit 3
Exercise 5
Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery
Creation
Simulation: Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery Creation

For more information on Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery Creation,
please view the simulation in the lesson Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries
online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
You intend to use delivery documents for recording and monitoring the transportation
process after the freight order has been planned. You need to understand how to trigger
delivery creation from SAP TM.
Note:
1. Create a delivery profile DEL-PROF-##. Deliveries shall be created per order.
2. Assign the calendar resource OPEN9TO5-## to your customer location TM2G##-01.
3. Create a freight order for your freight unit linked to the second sales order from the
previous exercise. It is the one with the entry TM-## in the Customer PO Number column
in the query Freight Units → All Order-Based Freight Units. Create the freight order directly
from the query with the option Create One Per Stage.
4. Trigger Delivery Creation for the freight unit. It is the one with the entry TM-## in the
Customer PO Number column in the query Freight Units → All Order-Based Freight Units.
Use delivery profile DEL-PROF-## and Layout DEL_BUILDER_S4TM1 for this purpose.
5. In which query can you find your freight unit now?
6. What are the predecessor and successor documents of your freight unit?

Unit 3
Solution 5
Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery
Creation
Simulation: Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery Creation

For more information on Create a Delivery Profile and Trigger Delivery Creation,
please view the simulation in the lesson Trigger, Create, and Manage Deliveries
Business Example
You intend to use delivery documents for recording and monitoring the transportation
process after the freight order has been planned. You need to understand how to trigger
delivery creation from SAP TM.
Note:
1. Create a delivery profile DEL-PROF-##. Deliveries shall be created per order.

a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Delivery Profile.
b) In the Delivery Profile field, enter DEL-PROF-##.
c) In the Description field, enter Delivery Profile User ##.
d) In the Delivery Creation dropdown menu, select Per Order.
e) Choose Save.
2. Assign the calendar resource OPEN9TO5-## to your customer location TM2G##-01.

a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Define Location.
b) In the Location field, enter TM2G##-01.
c) Choose Change.
d) Navigate to the Resources tab.
e) Select the radio button for Operating Times.
f) In the Inbound field, enter OPEN9TO5-##.
g) In the Outbound field, enter OPEN9TO5-##.

h) Choose Save.
i) Leave the transaction.
3. Create a freight order for your freight unit linked to the second sales order from the
previous exercise. It is the one with the entry TM-## in the Customer PO Number column
in the query Freight Units → All Order-Based Freight Units. Create the freight order directly
from the query with the option Create One Per Stage.
c) Select the freight unit for your second sales order from the previous exercise. It is the
one with the entry TM-## in the Customer PO Number column.
d) Choose Capacity Document → Create One Per Stage.
4. Trigger Delivery Creation for the freight unit. It is the one with the entry TM-## in the
Customer PO Number column in the query Freight Units → All Order-Based Freight Units.
Use delivery profile DEL-PROF-## and Layout DEL_BUILDER_S4TM1 for this purpose.
c) Select the freight unit for your second sales order from the previous exercise. It is the
one with the entry TM-## in the Customer PO Number column.
d) Choose Create Deliveries .
e) In the Profile and Layout Sets screen area, choose New.
f) In the Delivery Profile column, enter DEL-PROF-##.
g) In the Page Layout for Delivery Creation column, select DEL_BUILDER_S4TM1.
h) Choose Save.
i) Choose Start Creating Deliveries.
j) Choose Create Delivery Proposals.
k) Review the delivery proposal on the lower part of the screen.
l) Choose Create Deliveries.
m) Leave the transaction.
5. In which query can you find your freight unit now?
You find your freight unit now in the query for delivery-based freight units.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Logistics Integration → Delivery Integration

(Worklist).
b) Select query Freight Units → All Delivery-Based Freight Units.
c) If your freight unit does not show, choose Refresh.

d) Identify your freight unit. It is the one with the entry TM-## in the Customer PO
Number column.
6. What are the predecessor and successor documents of your freight unit?
Your sales order and delivery are the predecessor document of your freight unit. The
freight order that you have created earlier in this exercise is a successor of your freight
unit.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Logistics Integration → Delivery Integration

(Worklist).
b) Select query Freight Units → All Delivery-Based Freight Units.
e) If your freight unit does not show, choose Refresh.
f) Click on the freight unit number (Document column) . It is the one with the entry TM-
## in the Customer PO Number column.
g) Navigate to the Document Flow tab.
h) You will find the predecessor and successor documents here.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 3
Lesson 5
Building Packages
LESSON OBJECTIVES
● Build packages
Handling Units
A handling unit (HU) is a logistic unit consisting of packaging materials and goods (materials).
Typically, a company does not move individual pieces of different materials, rather, it moves
quantities of materials grouped together as packages. You can depict this situation in the SAP
System using Handling Unit Management.
Figure 82: Handling Unit
Animation: Handling Unit

For more information on Handling Unit, please view the animation in the lesson
Building Packages, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
When you use Handling Unit Management, the system tracks the entire HU rather than
individual materials. The HU is the common unit for material and information flow. A business
transaction for a HU implies corresponding business transactions in the background for the
materials and packaging materials it contains. In this way, one business transaction entry
takes the place of several individual material-movement entries.

Lesson: Building Packages
You can use handling units and can pass them to partners throughout the supply chain.
Handling units have a single identification number that uniquely identifies the handling unit
across the various processes through which it moves. Using handling units in a cross-system
logistics chain usually requires an identification number that is unique worldwide. You
therefore have the option of assigning a Serial Shipping Container Code (SSCC) number to
each handling unit.
Packaging Materials
Packaging materials are intended to enclose or hold together the materials that are to be
transported. The packaging materials and the goods material together comprise the handling
unit, as we have seen.
The material that is to be packed can be packed into or onto the packaging material. The
packaging material can also be a load carrier, such as a pallet. The most important packaging
materials include crates, boxes, containers, wire baskets, and pallets.
You have to maintain the material master data for each packaging material you want to use.
When creating material master records for packaging materials, enter either material type,
VERP (packaging) or a customer-specific material type that you have already defined in
Customizing.
Handling Units and Freight Units
Figure 84: Handling Unit and Freight Unit

Animation: Handling Unit and Freight Unit

For more information on Handling Unit and Freight Unit , please view the
animation in the lesson Building Packages, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
When a delivery includes handling unit items, the freight units are adjusted accordingly. All
product items that have been packaged into one handling unit are included in one freight unit;
they are not split across several freight units. In this way, it is ensured that parts of a handling
unit are not assigned to different freight orders during transportation planning.
If, for example, separate freight units were built per product initially, and these products are
consolidated into one handling unit, the separate freight units are merged into one freight
unit.
There is not necessarily a one-to-one relationship between handling units and freight units.
One freight unit can contain several handling units. If desired, freight unit building can be set
up to create one freight unit per handling unit.
Package Building
Orders are placed on products which, during the real process, are packaged to create
packages and pallets (HUs, TUs, main cargo items, and so on). Packaging is a warehouse
process. Warehouse-specific information can influence the result (for example, pick
sequence). For the end-to-end process, the package information is required long before the
warehouse is reached.
The goal for SAP TM is to close the gap between orders based on products and the load
planning happening for packages and pallets, as well as to enable a package building function
that considers warehouse information. Therefore, readily available packaging components
and product master data packaging-specific definitions are reused.
Figure 86: Package Building

Package Building is inserted into the overall planning process at the freight unit building step.
It allows products to be combined into packages. These packages (within freight units) are
later used in subsequent planning steps (manual and optimizer planning (VSR) to create
freight orders and subsequent load planning).
Figure 87: Parameters of Package Building
Package Building Parameters:

Package building is defined by the package building profile. This enables certain process
steps to be switched on or off, specific behavior to be defined (especially when building mixed
packages), and also offers default attributes that can be overwritten by product specific
settings.
The following are examples of parameters:
● Process Products by Layer: This parameter can turn off the creation of full product
packages. By default, this is very seldom required, but gives a mixed package building logic
more freedom. For example, a certain customer always requires a specific product
combination (even when ordering a high quantity), this can then be implemented in an
enhancement receiving a full set of products.
● Keep Layers Together: When building mixed packages, the parameter controls of a
product can be split over multiple mixed packages. In some situations, this might result in
a better and more efficient plan. However, in more warehouse driven scenarios, it might
not be efficient to process a product twice for two packages. Therefore, it can be turned
off.
● Ignore Product Height: When consolidating leftover products that are not filling a complete
package, nor a complete product layer, the system tries to build mixed layers combining
products with the same height. This step can be skipped if the product height is not
important. As a result, all of the leftover product quantities can be combined directly
resulting in standard non-stackable layers.
The package building profile is assigned to the freight unit building rule. In addition, for freight
unit building you can define the maximum number of package items that can be put into a
single freight unit.

The relevant package building profile can be set depending on the process in:
● Freight unit building rule: define package building profile , store package estimate vs
packaging hierarchy.
● Planning profile: define package building profile, enabling consolidation package building.
Product and Package Type Assignment:
Figure 88: Product Package Type Assignment
The product and package type assignment is a new master data transaction that defines, for
each product in the package builder, which package it goes into or onto.
To reduce the effort when maintaining those definitions, it is possible to work with generic
patterns.
The definition can be dependent on the material/ product, business partner, and shipping
location. For example, product A is usually delivered with an EU pallet stacked up to 1.5
meters (first entry). However, when delivering this product to customer X from your
warehouse Y, you use a different pallet type containing product A stacked up to 1.3 meters,
because the customer can only handle pallets up to this height (second entry as exception).
The package builder will always prefer the most specific entry. It will start to search for an
entry matching all 3 key fields exactly. If nothing is found, it will score all other keys in the
following manner:
● How many keys match exactly?
● How many keys match by pattern?
● How many keys are initial?
It will then select the key with the highest score.

Figure 89: Early Package Building
Package Building Selected Features: During package building, the system bundles products
into packages based on specific constraints, while also keeping the total number of packages
to a minimum. The system can also specify the exact position and orientation of each product
item. You can define these constraints for different combinations of product, business
partner, equipment, and location. If several constraints apply, the system always uses the
most specific constraint.
Figure 90: Mixed Package Building
Animation: Mixed Package Building

For more information on Mixed Package Building, please view the animation in
the lesson Building Packages, online in the SAP Learning Hub.

The system creates mixed packages based on one of the following consolidation types:
● Volume
● Layer Definitions
● Incompatibilities, stacking rules, and product orientations (based on these values, the
system determines the exact positions of each product item in the package (detailed
mixed package building))
Furthermore, the definition allows specific limits to be set regarding the weight and height
that the package builder will consider when packing the product. It is possible to set generally
valid limits on the package material (that is, product master data). For example, you can only
stack an EU pallet up to 1.8 meters and put 900 kg on it. In the product and package type
assignment, you can lower the specific product, customer, and location limits.
Figure 92: Package Building Options
When creating packages, the system can split the quantity of a product using the following
criteria:
● Quantity per package
● Maximum height of the package
● Maximum weight of the package
If different products are to be packaged, the system considers the lowest maximum height
and the lowest maximum weight for a product or a packaging material. For example, if each
product has a different maximum height, the system uses the lowest maximum height.
The result of package building is different types of packages, as follows:
● Packages that contain only a single type of product
● Mixed packages that contain several different products
● Packages that consist of several layers: The layers within a package can also contain
different products, which results in mixed layers.

● Nested packages, that is, a package in another package: For example, you can plan 24
cans in one box and 100 boxes in ten layers on one pallet.
● Full packages or incomplete packages: Incomplete packages provide room for further
consolidation.
● Flat or uneven packages: Flat packages are a prerequisite for stackability.
"Late" Package Building: The "late" or "consolidation" package building process defers the
package building process until the vehicle scheduling and routing process has created freight
orders for the individual tours. This allows to add additional information into the package
building process, that is, which products are to be delivered with the same truck/tour/freight
order. Consequently, this information can be utilized to build packages/pallets across freight
units/deliveries.
Figure 93: Late Package Building
Package Units: The Package Unit (PU) is an additional business document. It represents one
or multiple packages to be transported together across multiple stages (capacity
documents). The PU is not needed if there is only one stage. It can have a deep packaging
hierarchy, for example, pallet – carton – product. It is (technically) a transportation unit (like
container units, trailer units, and railcar units). It can represent both capacity document and
demand document. That means, package units can be assigned to freight orders / bookings
and container / trailer / railcar units, but at the same time freight units can be assigned to a
package unit. Typical examples for package units are pallet, pallet cage, box, carton.
The package unit provides additional functionality to enable an integrated delivery and line
haul planning process:

Figure 94: Integrated Delivery and Line-haul Planning Process
The PU type allows defining the flexibility of assigning predecessor documents to the PU:
● Completely: A freight unit is completely assigned to the PU. This is the standard approach
of assigning freight units.
● Partially: A freight unit can be distributed among multiple PUs (multi-assignment), but the
PUs are assigned to one single capacity document. This is a new approach, which helps to
avoid freight unit splits and an increasing number of documents in scenarios with freight
units' items distributed across multiple package units (for example, pallets).
If PUs containing the same freight unit get assigned to different capacity documents, the
freight unit gets split to ensure the fundamental freight unit consistency principle (it
represents the goods transported together across the whole transportation chain).
Figure 95: Package Unit - Multi Assignment

Unit 3
Exercise 6
Configure Package Building and Create
Packages based on Sales Orders
Simulation: Configure Package Building and Create Packages based on Sales

Orders
For more information on Configure Package Building and Create Packages based
on Sales Orders, please view the simulation in the lesson Building Packages
Business Example
You are a consultant and want to show your customer how to use the package building
functionality of TM in SAP S/4HANA. For this purpose, you have to create a package building
profile and assign it to your freight unit building rule.
Note:
1. Create a package building profile PBP-S4TM2-##. Use the Package Builder. Ignore
incomplete products and select PAL as the unit of measure for normalized quantity. The
mode for mixed package building should be detailed. The product arrangement should be
in layers and profile S4TM2-PBOPT should be used as a profile for the package building
optimizer.
2. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-PB-##. The freight unit building rule should use
should be allowed and package building profile PBP-S4TM2-## should be used. In
addition, use the following data:

Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-PB-##
Description FUBR User ## for Package Building
Document Type FUT2

Parts)

Field Value

Field Value
Package Building Profile PBP-S4TM2-##
Maximum No. of Top-Level Packages per 100

FU
Package Building Result Create Complete Package Hierarchy

Building
Gross Volume M3 80
3. Review the package type assignment for product TM-MAT-P1.
4. Which packaging material is assigned to product TM-MAT-P1?
5. What is the maximum weight of a package from material TM-MAT-P1 and packaging
material TM-MAT-V1?
6. What is the length, width, and height of material TM-MAT-P1? What is its gross weight?
7. What is the gross weight of packaging material TM-MAT-V1?

● Division: 00
You want to sell 100 PCs of material TM-MAT-P1 and the customer reference is PB-##.
9. Check whether freight units have been created for your sales order by filtering the All
10. Which document type (freight unit type) is used and which freight unit building rule was
applied to create the freight unit?
11. How many packages have been created? What is the gross weight of each package?
12. What is the tare weight, net weight, and gross weight of a full pallet?

Unit 3
Solution 6
Configure Package Building and Create
Packages based on Sales Orders
Simulation: Configure Package Building and Create Packages based on Sales

Orders
For more information on Configure Package Building and Create Packages based
on Sales Orders, please view the simulation in the lesson Building Packages
Business Example
You are a consultant and want to show your customer how to use the package building
functionality of TM in SAP S/4HANA. For this purpose, you have to create a package building
profile and assign it to your freight unit building rule.
Note:
1. Create a package building profile PBP-S4TM2-##. Use the Package Builder. Ignore
incomplete products and select PAL as the unit of measure for normalized quantity. The
mode for mixed package building should be detailed. The product arrangement should be
in layers and profile S4TM2-PBOPT should be used as a profile for the package building
optimizer.
b) In Customizing, choose Transportation Management → Planning → Package Building

→ Define Package Building Profile.
c) Choose New Entries.
d) In the Package Building Profile field, enter PBP-S4TM2-## .
e) In the Package Building Profile Description field, enter Package Building Profile
for user ## .
f) In the Logging Severity dropdown field, select Logging of all Message.
g) In the Package Building Engine dropdown field, select Package Builder.
h) Select the Ignore Incomplete Products checkbox.
i) In the UoM of NLQ field, enter PAL.

j) In the Mixed Package Building Mode dropdown field, select Detailed Mixed
Package Building.
k) In the Product Arrangement dropdown field, select Layers Only.
l) In the Profile for Package Building Optimizer field, enter S4TM2-PBOPT.
m) Choose Save.
n) Exit the activity.
2. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-PB-##. The freight unit building rule should use
should be allowed and package building profile PBP-S4TM2-## should be used. In
addition, use the following data:

Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-PB-##
Description FUBR User ## for Package Building
Document Type FUT2

Parts)

Field Value
Package Building Profile PBP-S4TM2-##
Maximum No. of Top-Level Packages per 100

FU
Package Building Result Create Complete Package Hierarchy

Building
Gross Volume M3 80

Rule.
3. Review the package type assignment for product TM-MAT-P1.

a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Change Package Type
Assignment.
b) In the Dialog Structure, select Product-BP-Location.
c) Select the row with product number TM-MAT-P1.
4. Which packaging material is assigned to product TM-MAT-P1?
Packaging Material TM-MAT-V1 is assigned to product TM-MAT-P1.
a) Select the row with product number TM-MAT-P1 and check the Packaging Material
column.
5. What is the maximum weight of a package from material TM-MAT-P1 and packaging
material TM-MAT-V1?
The maximum weight of a package is 500 kg.
a) Select the row with product number TM-MAT-P1 and check the columns Maximum
Weight of Package and Max. Weight Unit of Measure.
6. What is the length, width, and height of material TM-MAT-P1? What is its gross weight?
The gross weight is shown on the Basic Data 1 tab. It is 16 kg. The length, width, and height
is on the Units of Measure tab. Length and width are 25 cm. The height is 50 cm.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Master Data → Display Material.
b) In the Material field, enter TM-MAT-P1 and choose Continue.
c) In the pop-up window, select the Basic Data 1 view and choose Continue.
d) Check the gross weight.
e) Choose the Additional Data button.

f) Navigate to the Units of Measure tab.
g) Select the row with 1 PC and scroll to the right to find length, width, and height.
7. What is the gross weight of packaging material TM-MAT-V1?
The gross weight is shown on the Basic Data 1 tab. It is 22 kg.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Master Data → Display Material.
b) In the Material field, enter TM-MAT-V1 and choose Continue.
c) In the pop-up window, select the Basic Data 1 view and choose Continue.
d) Check the gross weight.
● Division: 00
You want to sell 100 PCs of material TM-MAT-P1 and the customer reference is PB-##.
● Division: 00
c) Choose Continue.
● Customer Reference: PB-##
● Material: TM-MAT-P1
e) Choose Save.
9. Check whether freight units have been created for your sales order by filtering the All

b) Select the query Freight Units → All Order-Based Freight Units.
10. Which document type (freight unit type) is used and which freight unit building rule was
applied to create the freight unit?
Freight unit type FUT2 is used and freight unit building rule FUBR-PB-## was applied.
a) Click on the freight unit number (the Document column) for your sales order. It is the
one with the entry PB-## in the Customer PO Number column.
b) Navigate to the General Data tab.
c) You will find the freight unit building rule FUBR-PB-## and freight unit type FUT2 being
referenced here.
11. How many packages have been created? What is the gross weight of each package?
Four packages have been created. Three full pallets with 29 PCs and a gross weight of 486
kg and one package with 13 PCs and a gross weight of 220 kg.
a) Navigate to the Items tab.
b) Check the package structure.
12. What is the tare weight, net weight, and gross weight of a full pallet?
The gross weight of a full pallet is 486 kg. It consists of the gross weight of the packaging
material (22kg) (that is, the tare weight) and 29 times the gross weight of the material TM-
MAT-P1 (16 kg), that is, 29*16=464kg (the net weight).
b) Select one row with a full package (gross weight = 486 kg).
c) In the area below, navigate to the Quantities tab.

LESSON SUMMARY
● Build packages

Unit 3
Lesson 6
Understanding Change Controller
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Process Controller
The process controller is a framework with which you can define your own strategies,
methods, and how your planning process is executed.
You can use strategies to define complete processes. By assigning a service, you define the
area in which the process is to be used, for example, transportation charge management,
freight unit building, or VSR optimization. SAP delivers a number of standard strategies.
Methods define the individual process steps of a strategy.
Figure 97: Process Controller
Animation: Process Controller

For more information on Process Controller , please view the animation in the
lesson Understanding Change Controller, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
You use strategies in SAP Transportation Management in the following areas:

● Freight unit building

Lesson: Understanding Change Controller
● Carrier selection
● VSR optimization
● Manual planning
● Change controller
● Definition of customer-specific functions
In this lesson, we are going to focus on change controller. The other areas listed will be
explained in other units.
Change Controller
Whenever there are changes to transportation requirements, for which follow-up documents
already exist, SAP TM provides support to react to these changes. For example, if the quantity
of a sales order changes, and that sales order is already planned in SAP TM, you might have to
adjust your transportation plan. SAP TM provides a configurable, flexible framework to
support change processes. In the example of a quantity change, the system can check the
resource capacity and remove freight units from planning if the resource is overloaded. In
addition, a user could be informed of changes via an alert.
Figure 99: Change Controller
Animation: Change Controller

For more information on Change Controller, please view the animation in the
lesson Understanding Change Controller, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
The change controller checks whether one of the following business documents/objects has
changed and how the system is to process these changes:
● Freight unit
● Transportation unit

● Freight order
● Freight booking
● Service order
● Schedule type
The change controller can react to the following planning-relevant changes:

● Changes to quantity
● Changes to dates/times
● Changes to source locations, intermediate stops, and destination locations
● Reported execution information
● Additional or deleted freight units or locations
Note that this is not an exhaustive list.

The following is an example of change controller actions in response to changes:
● Remove corresponding freight units from the transportation plan
● Invalidate successor business documents such as freight orders
● Stop the current associated tendering processes
● Stop and restart the current associated tendering processes
● Issue alerts
You can also define your own actions. You can also react to other changes, and even to
custom fields. If you want to enhance the standard logic of the change controller for
determining changes to business documents, you must make the necessary settings for the
following BAdI:
Determination of Changes for Change Controller
SAP TM provides a set of predefined change strategies. You use strategies to define complete
processes. Methods define the individual process steps of a strategy. You can also define your
own strategies and methods, and in doing so, the way in which your process is executed.
If the system is unable to process a change controller strategy due to a locking issue, you can
use the background program /SCMTMS/PROCESS_TRIGGER_BGD to reprocess the
strategy.
The configuration settings relating to how changes should be processed on a freight unit,
freight order, or freight bookings are located in the type customizing of these documents. You
can specify the change controller settings for the business document types in SAP TM
Customizing:

Figure 101: Change Controller Settings
● Default Change Strategy: You can assign a default change controller strategy (default
strategy) to each business document type. If you have defined several change controller
strategies, you can use a condition for determining the adequate change controller
strategy.
● Strategy Determination Condition: If you indicate a strategy determination condition, the
system uses the change strategy found via the condition. The system determines the
change controller strategy at runtime based on the strategy determination condition. If
you do not indicate a condition or if the condition does not return a strategy, the system
automatically uses the default change strategy.
● Quantity Tolerance Determination Condition: You can use a tolerance determination
condition to determine tolerances that are to be taken into account in the case of a
quantity change in a business document (freight unit, freight booking, or freight order).
This means that if a quantity is changed, the change controller evaluates this condition to
dynamically check if a quantity change can be tolerated. If no condition of this type is
assigned to a business document, only the standard logic to classify quantity changes is
processed. The standard logic classifies all quantity changes as relevant quantity changes.
This means that in case of a quantity change, the change controller evaluates this
condition to dynamically determine if this quantity change can be classified as relevant or
if it can be ignored. You assign this quantity tolerance determination condition to your
business document type (for example, freight unit type). The result of a tolerance
determination condition has an impact on the evaluation of the change controller condition
that is assigned to the same business document type. The indicator for a quantity change
that is provided as a data access definition to the change controller condition can change
from "Relevant Quantity Change Determined" to "No Relevant Quantity Change
Determined" if the quantity change is within the tolerances found.
● Date tolerance determination condition: You can use a date tolerance determination
condition to determine the tolerances for a date change in a business document. This
means that in case of a date change, the change controller evaluates this condition to

dynamically determine if this date change can be classified as critical or uncritical or if it

can be ignored. If you want to classify date changes according to your own logic, you can
use this condition to enhance the standard logic. If no condition of this type is assigned to a
business document (freight unit, freight booking, or freight order), only the standard logic
to classify date changes is processed. The standard logic classifies all date changes as
critical changes. You assign this date tolerance determination condition to your business
document type (for example, freight unit type). The result of a date tolerance
determination condition has an impact on the evaluation of the change controller condition
that is assigned to the same business document type. The indicator for a date change that
is provided as a data access definition to the change controller condition can change from
“Critical Change” to “Non-Critical Change” or “No Change” if the date change is within the
tolerances found.

Unit 3
Exercise 7
Explore Change Controller Strategies
Simulation: Explore Change Controller Strategies

For more information on Explore Change Controller Strategies, please view the
simulation in the lesson Understanding Change Controller online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Business Example
You are a consultant and want to show your customer how change controller strategies are
determined and how you can control system behaviour using them. For this purpose, you
create a sales order, plan it, and subsequently change the ship-to-party.
Note:
1. Review the Change Strategy Determination Condition CHACO_DET_00. Which strategy is

determined for location changes?
2. Assign the Change Strategy Determination Condition CHACO_DET_00 to your Freight

Unit Type FU##.
● Division: 00
4. Create a freight order for your freight unit created in the previous step. It is the one with
the entry TM-## in the Customer PO Number column in the query Freight Units → All
Order-Based Freight Units. Create the freight order directly from the query with the option
Create One Per Stage.
5. Review the freight order in SAP TM. Note down the freight order number.

What is the freight unit’s planning status? What is the freight order’s life cycle status?
6. Change the Sold-To-Party of your sales order to TM2G##-02.
7. Review the freight order in SAP TM.
Is the freight order still assigned to the sales order and the freight unit? What is the freight
order’s life cycle status? What is the freight unit’s planning status?

Unit 3
Solution 7
Explore Change Controller Strategies
Simulation: Explore Change Controller Strategies

For more information on Explore Change Controller Strategies, please view the
simulation in the lesson Understanding Change Controller online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Business Example
You are a consultant and want to show your customer how change controller strategies are
determined and how you can control system behaviour using them. For this purpose, you
create a sales order, plan it, and subsequently change the ship-to-party.
Note:
1. Review the Change Strategy Determination Condition CHACO_DET_00. Which strategy is

determined for location changes?
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Condition.
b) Enter CHACO_DET_00 and choose Continue.
c) Verify that strategy REM_CANC is determined for location changes.
2. Assign the Change Strategy Determination Condition CHACO_DET_00 to your Freight

Unit Type FU##.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Transportation Management →
Planning → Freight Unit → Define Freight Unit Types.
b) Open the details of your Freight Unit Type FU##.
c) Enter CHACO_DET_00 in the Change Strategy Determination Cond. field.
d) Save your work and exit the screen.
● Division: 00

● Division: 00
c) Choose Continue.
e) Choose Save.
4. Create a freight order for your freight unit created in the previous step. It is the one with
the entry TM-## in the Customer PO Number column in the query Freight Units → All
Order-Based Freight Units. Create the freight order directly from the query with the option
Create One Per Stage.
c) Select the freight unit created in the previous step. It is the one with the entry TM-## in
the Customer PO Number column.
d) Choose Capacity Document → Create One Per Stage.
5. Review the freight order in SAP TM. Note down the freight order number.
What is the freight unit’s planning status? What is the freight order’s life cycle status?
The freight unit status is Planned. The freight order’s life cycle status is In Process.
c) Select the freight unit created in the previous step. It is the one with the entry TM-## in
the Customer PO Number column and open it by clicking on its number.
d) On the Statuses tab, review the freight unit's planning status.

e) On the Document Flow tab, review the freight order’s life cycle status.
f) Note down the freight order number.
6. Change the Sold-To-Party of your sales order to TM2G##-02.

a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Sales Documents → Change Sales Orders.
b) Enter the number of the previously created sales order and press Enter.
c) Change the Sold-To-Party to TM2G##-02.
d) Confirm all popups and choose Redetermine where applicable.
e) Save your changes.
7. Review the freight order in SAP TM.
Is the freight order still assigned to the sales order and the freight unit? What is the freight
order’s life cycle status? What is the freight unit’s planning status?
No, the freight order is no longer assigned. The freight order’s life cycle status has
changed to Canceled. The freight unit status has changed to Not Planned.
c) Choose Refresh.
d) Select the freight unit created in the previous step. It is the one with the entry TM-## in
the Customer PO Number column and open it by clicking on its number.
e) On the Statuses tab, review the freight unit's planning status.
f) On the Document Flow tab, verify that no freight order is linked to your freight unit.
g) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Order Management → Edit Road Freight Order.
h) Enter the freight order number of the previously created freight order and choose
Continue.
i) On the Statuses tab, review the freight order's life cycle status.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 3
Learning Assessment
1. You can assign logistics integration profile to a sales order document type?
X True
X False
2. In SAP S/4HANA, a freight unit can be manually created.

X True
X False
3. How are input values for a condition determined?

X A Using direct business object access
X B Using the data crawler
X C Using a determination class
X D Using a process controller strategy
4. Which of the following settings can be maintained in the delivery profile?

X A Fixing of planning results
X B Consolidation options for planned freight units
X C Incompatibilities
X D Inclusion of blocked documents

5. What are the allowed relationships between freight units and handling units?
X A 1:1
X B 1:n
X C n:1
6. The change controller allows you to react to changes in quantities, dates/times, and
locations.
X True
X False

UNIT 4 Transportation Planning
Preparation
Lesson 1
Transportation Planning 142
Exercise 8: Create Freight Order Types 151
Lesson 2
Selection and Planning Profiles 157
Exercise 9: Create a Selection Profile 161
Exercise 10: Create a Planning Profile 169
Lesson 3
Transportation Cockpit 176
Exercise 11: Configure a Transportation Cockpit Layout 183
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand the transportation planning process

● Understand the selection and planning profile
● Understand the transportation cockpit

Unit 4
Lesson 1
Transportation Planning
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Reasons for Transportation Planning

The goal of SAP TM is to provide customers with the ability to either manually or
automatically plan and optimize their transportation requests. This includes the ability to
perform order consolidation, where a company can group orders with the same ship-from and
ship-to locations for more efficient transportation quantities. If multiple orders are being
shipped within a predefined transportation zone, your company can try to efficiently schedule
and route the multiple orders, and choose the appropriate carrier. The planning and selection
can be determined using the most cost effective and timely route from source to destination
while considering real-world constraints, costs, and penalties. The optimizer is capable of
making multi-modal decisions such as sea, air, truck, train, and any combination thereof. The
SAP TM planning function can also perform multi-pickup and stop options.
Transportation planning activities in SAP TM can be performed manually and automatically as
well as interactively and in the background. For interactive planning, the central planning UI is
the transportation cockpit. Both manual and automatic planning activities are performed
there based on planning strategies (for example, one-step optimization).
Order Consolidation
Order consolidation is the grouping of orders with the same ship-from and ship-to locations to
create more efficient shipment quantities.
The result of order consolidation is that one or more freight units are combined into one
freight order. A freight unit is a business object representing the smallest possible
transportation unit. Business examples of order consolidation are multiple orders that have
been received over time and can be planned to be shipped together. This can be at individual
line item level. Customers who make-to-order, and do not ship complete orders to their
customers, may consolidate line items from multiple orders as they are produced and as their
delivery-due lists are created.

Lesson: Transportation Planning
Routing and Scheduling
Figure 103: Routing, Scheduling, and Carrier Selection
Animation: Routing, Scheduling, and Carrier Selection

For more information on Routing, Scheduling, and Carrier Selection, please view
the animation in the lesson Transportation Planning , online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
The figure Routing, Scheduling and Carrier Selection outlines the process of routing and
scheduling in the following way: a freight unit X is first routed using the transportation
planning function, for example, a transportation proposal. Based on this routing, three stages
are created for freight unit X, as follows:
● A stage for US road pick-up transport
● A stage for the ocean voyage
● A stage for EU road delivery transport
Up to a certain point, these stages are planned independently of each other because different
(local) planners may be responsible for scheduling each of the three stages. A freight order is
created as a result of this stage. Finally, carriers are selected based on specific criteria. This is
described as a three-step process but a planner can decide whether to perform planning and
carrier selection in two steps or three. It is also possible for the SAP TM optimization function
to plan all three steps in one run – this planning strategy is called one step optimization.
Process Steps
The steps involved in the process, whether one, two, or three step, can be described as
follows:
● Three step

Unit 4: Transportation Planning Preparation
1. Determine routing (transportation proposal)
2. Vehicle scheduling and routing to create a freight order
3. Carrier selection
● Two step
1. Vehicle scheduling and routing to create a freight order
2. Carrier selection
● One step
1. One-step optimization determines the route and plan, creates a freight order and
selects a carrier
Manual and Automatic Transportation Planning
Figure 105: Manual and Automatic Transportation Planning
Animation: Manual and Automatic Transportation Planning

For more information on Manual and Automatic Transportation Planning, please
view the animation in the lesson Transportation Planning , online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Transportation planning activities in SAP TM can be performed manually and automatically,

as well as interactively and in the background. For interactive planning, the central planning UI
is the transportation cockpit. Both manual and automatic planning activities are performed
there based on planning strategies (for example, one-step optimization).
Planning Constraints
SAP TM can consider numerous constraints during planning. Which ones are relevant and
should be used in a specific scenario largely depends on the scenario itself. Constraints can
have physical root causes, such as vehicle capacity or handling capabilities for loading and

unloading at certain facilities. On the other hand, constraints can have process-related root
causes. For example, a delivery tour should have a maximum of 25 drops in a day. This is a
maximum that will fit in a driver’s daily schedule, assuming they have to unload at the door
and do some paperwork for each customer drop.
Assets, Facilities, Resources and Times
There are a number of assets, facilities, resources, and times:
● Vehicle capacity
● Vehicle combinations (truck and trailer)
● Compartments
● Depot locations
● Handling resources, opening hours (calendars and shift patterns)
● Schedules
● Incompatibilities – constraints by design
Process and Execution Constraints

There are a number of process and execution constraints:
● Decreasing capacities
● Max number of transshipment locations
● Max limits on distance, duration, or stopovers
● Pick-up and deliver time windows
● Min and max storage time at hub – cross-docking changeover
● Loading and unloading durations
● Scheduling constraints
Freight Orders
The freight order's execution is planned by a carrier or the shipper. The freight order contains
the following:
● When and onto which vehicle freight units are to be loaded
● Planned departure times for the vehicle
● Execution data
Freight orders are used for land transportation and freight bookings are used for sea and air
transportation. Freight orders contain the following information:
● Planning information, for example, planned means of transport and stages, routing,
planned pickup and delivery dates, durations, and distances
● Document dependencies, as well as predecessor and successor documents
● Transportation charges and cost distribution
● Cargo information: quantities and weights, goods information

● Execution information
● Business partner information
● Output management
● Status information and blocking information
● Subcontracting information
Methods/Ways of Creating Freight Orders:
1. Manually: Manual creation is generally used when you already know the most important
transportation data, such as source location, destination location, and business partner,
because you regularly transport goods for a certain customer using a certain carrier.
2. Work-list: Some of the information, like source and destination location, are automatically
populated in the freight order if you create the freight order from the freight unit work-list.
3. Copying: You can create a freight order by copying an existing one (a reference
document). The system copies the header data and the logistical data. However, it does
not copy references to freight units and execution information.
4. FUBR rule: You can create freight orders via the short-cut process on the basis of a freight
unit building rule, which will be explained in more detail later in this lesson.
5. The more advanced features of creating freight orders are their interactive creation in the
transportation cockpit, VSR optimization, and the use of transportation proposal
functionality. These topics will be covered once we have finished the relevant
configuration.
A freight order type defines parameters that influence how the system processes the freight
order. When manually creating a freight order, the user has to select a freight order type. If
freight orders are created during planning and have associated settings in the planning
profile, the system determines the freight order type according to the Customizing settings.

Figure 107: Freight Order Type
Animation: Freight Order Type

For more information on Freight Order Type, please view the animation in the
lesson Transportation Planning , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
● Number range intervals

● Basic Settings:
- Determining shipper and ship-to-party
- Specifying if a freight order can be subcontracted
- Defining whether a freight order is to be deleted or only canceled
- Define subcontracting relevance
- Define sequence types:
■ Defined and Linear: The sequence of stages is linear, which means that there is a
single start stage and all other stages have one predecessor stage. There is also a
single end stage and all other stages have one successor stage.
■ Non-Linear (Star-Shaped): All stages have the same start location but different end
locations. The graphical structure of the transportation chain has a star shape.
■ Disconnected: All stages are separate from each other and each stage has its own
start and end location.

■ Star-Shaped Based on FU Stages: Based on the information from the freight units,
the stages have the same start location but different end locations (for example, for
parcel freight orders or freight orders for customer pick-up).
■ Star-Shaped Based on FU Stages (Reversed): Based on the information from the
freight units, the stages have the same end location but different start locations (for
example, for freight orders for customer self-delivery).
■ Linear with (De-)Consolidation Stages: This sequence type contains three parts.
■ In the first part (pre-carriage), all stages have different start locations but the
same end location at which consolidation takes place. The graphical structure of
the transportation chain has a star shape.
■ In the second part (main carriage), the sequence of stages is linear.
■ In the third part (on-carriage), all stages have the same start location at which
deconsolidation takes place but different end locations. The graphical structure
of the transportation chain has a star shape.
■ Undefined: There is no sequence of stages since there are no stages, only locations.
● Charge Calculation and Settlement Document Settings:
- Enabling charges and settlement
- Enable cost distribution
● Execution Settings: You can define, for example, whether the system is to perform the
execution steps within Transportation Management. You can define additional conditions
that need to be fulfilled so that the status Ready for Execution can be set. Moreover, you
can define settings for integration with SAP Event Management.
● Organizational Unit Determination: You can define how the system determines the
purchasing organization and the execution organization. The system first checks the
Condition field. If you have not entered a condition or if the condition does not return a
result, the system checks whether the Consider Organization Unit of User checkbox is
selected and whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization and an execution
organization. If the user is not assigned to a purchasing organization and an execution
organization, the system uses the data maintained in the Default Org Unit area.
● Change Controller Settings: You can define settings for the change controller, for example,
a default change strategy and a condition for change strategy determination.
● Output Options: You can define an output profile and a text schema, for example.
Freight Bookings
Freight bookings are used to reserve freight space on a vessel or in an airplane. The
corresponding mode-specific freight documents are called ocean freight bookings and air
freight bookings. They provide mode-specific information, such as the vessel name or flight
number. The space reserved by freight bookings is consumed by assigning freight units or
container units to the bookings.
An ocean freight booking represents ocean transportation from a port of loading to a port of
discharge, and an air freight booking represents air transportation from an airport of
departure to an airport of destination. Freight bookings can cover a consolidation location
before the source and de-consolidation location after the port. These consolidation and de-
consolidation locations are called container freight stations (CFSs) in the ocean case and
gateways for the air case.

Methods/Ways of Creating Freight Bookings:

● Manually
● Work-list
● Copying
A freight order type defines parameters that influence how the system processes the freight
bookings.
Figure 109: Freight Booking Types
The following are a few differences between freight orders and freight bookings:
● All booking types can be subcontracted, in contrast to freight order types, which can forbid
subcontracting to cover transportation businesses fully relying on their own fleets.
Although carrier selection and tendering are offered for freight orders, only carrier
selection is possible for freight bookings. In most scenarios, the carrier is already known at
the time of booking creation.
● Whereas freight orders allow star-shaped, unrelated, and other stage structures, freight
bookings allow only sequential stages.
● Freight orders cover self-delivery and self-pickup scenarios, which are not relevant for
freight bookings.
● You can create pickup and delivery freight orders for the stages from consolidation
location to source (air-) port and from destination (air-) port to de-consolidation location,
respectively. The freight booking type can define the pickup freight order type and delivery
freight order type.
● You cannot assign drivers to bookings.


Unit 4
Exercise 8
Create Freight Order Types
Simulation: Create Freight Order Types

For more information on Create Freight Order Types, please view the simulation
in the lesson Transportation Planning online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure the freight order type needed
for planning in SAP TM.
The freight order type defines the most important settings for the freight order. In this
exercise, you can practice creating freight order types.
Note:
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, view the number ranges used in freight order management.
2. Create a freight order type F2## using the following data and configure the settings based
on the business requirements:
Field Value
Freight Order Type F2##
Freight Order Description Freight Order F2##
Sequence Type of Stages Defined and Linear
Default Change Strategy DEF_CHACO
Output Profile /SCMTMS/TOR
Add. Output Profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD
Text Schema DEFAULT
Purchasing Org. 50000721
Last Exp. Event UNLOAD_END
Business requirements:

● The freight order number should be determined when saving.
● The freight order numbers should be numbers between 200000000 and 299999999.
● The transportation mode for the freight orders should default to road.
● External carriers could be assigned to the freight order.
● The shipper party determination should be based on predecessor documents.
● The user can delete the freight order if necessary.
● The units of measure in the freight order should default to Kilogram and Cubic meter.
● The user can calculate the transportation charges in the freight orders.
● The freight orders are to be settled.
● The Default FSD Type should be set to Freight Settlement.
3. What is the purpose of the Sequence Type of Stages?

Unit 4
Solution 8
Simulation: Create Freight Order Types

For more information on Create Freight Order Types, please view the simulation
in the lesson Transportation Planning online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure the freight order type needed
for planning in SAP TM.
The freight order type defines the most important settings for the freight order. In this
exercise, you can practice creating freight order types.
Note:
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, view the number ranges used in freight order management.
b) Choose Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Define

Number Range Intervals for Freight Order Management.
c) Choose Execute
d) To show the number range groups used, choose Intervals.
e) Note the available objects for assignment later to TOR type.
f) Choose Exit.
2. Create a freight order type F2## using the following data and configure the settings based
on the business requirements:
Field Value

Field Value
Text Schema DEFAULT
Business requirements:
● The freight order number should be determined when saving.
● The freight order numbers should be numbers between 200000000 and 299999999.
● The transportation mode for the freight orders should default to road.
● External carriers could be assigned to the freight order.
● The shipper party determination should be based on predecessor documents.
● The user can delete the freight order if necessary.
● The units of measure in the freight order should default to Kilogram and Cubic meter.
● The user can calculate the transportation charges in the freight orders.
● The freight orders are to be settled.
● The Default FSD Type should be set to Freight Settlement.
b) In Customizing, choose Transportation Management → Freight Order Management

→ Freight Order → Define Freight Order Type.
d) Enter the data provided in the table.

Field Value
Time for Drawing Draw number when saving docu-

ment
Transportation Mode 01(Road)
Freight Order Can be Subcontracted Relevant for Subcontracting

Field Value
Shipper/Ship-to Party Determination Determination based on Prede-

cessor Documents
Freight Order Can be Deleted Selected

Text Schema DEFAULT
Enable Charge Calculation Selected

Enable Settlement Selected
Default FSD Type Freight Settlement (001)
Default Unit of Measure for Weight Kilogram
Default Unit of Measure for Volume Cubic meter
e) Save and exit the function.
3. What is the purpose of the Sequence Type of Stages?
The Sequence Type of Stages specifies the type of structure to link stages to one another.
Seven sequence types are available for freight order types, among them: (1) Defined and
Linear - The sequence of stages is linear, which means that there is a single start stage
and all other stages have one predecessor stage. There is also a single end stage and all
other stages have one successor stage. (2) Non-Linear (Star-Shaped) - All stages have the
same start location but different end locations. The graphical structure of the
transportation chain has a star shape. (3) Star-Shaped Based on FU Stages - Based on the
information from the freight units, the stages have the same start location but different
end locations (for example, for parcel freight orders or freight orders for customer pick-
up).

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 4
Lesson 2
Selection and Planning Profiles
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Selection Profile
Freight units are selected based on the dates and times they were originally scheduled to be
picked up (loading start) and delivered.
Within each section, you define an inclusive or exclusive set of location values that determine
which freight units are relevant for planning. Each section allows users to define specific
values or ranges of values. Using these parameters of greater than, less than or not equal to
users are able to define precise criteria for planning.
Selection profiles are used to select documents/objects (freight units, freight orders, freight
bookings and transportation units). The selection profile is a user-specific grouping of
business documents that is considered during transportation planning. The system takes into
account the selection profile created during interactive planning, VSR optimization, and
carrier selection.
Figure 111: Selection Profile

Animation: Selection Profile

For more information on Selection Profile , please view the animation in the
lesson Selection and Planning Profiles, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
In the selection profile and in the assigned selection attributes, you define which business
documents the system is to take into account, as well as the maximum number of
documents. You can assign the following selection attributes to a selection profile:
● Time-related selection attributes in which you define the demand horizon.
● Geographical selection attributes in which you define source and destination locations or
zones.
● Additional selection attributes in which you define additional attributes for database
queries.
Figure 113: Geographical Selection Attributes
Geographical Selection Attributes: In a company’s planning department, geography is often

used as a way to allocate planning responsibility. For example, an individual or team might be
responsible for a specific plant, distribution center or group of customers in a geographical
area. The geographical selection attributes in the selection profile allow the team to limit their
view in such a way that they only see FUs or FOs for which they have responsibility.
Animation: Geographical Selection Attributes

For more information on Geographical Selection Attributes , please view the
animation in the lesson Selection and Planning Profiles, online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
The geographical profile distinguishes which source and destination locations are relevant for
freight unit selection. The geographical profile is split into four sections:

Lesson: Selection and Planning Profiles
● Source Locations
● Source Transportation Zones
● Destination Locations
● Destination Transportation Zones
Within each section, you define an inclusive or exclusive set of location values that determine
which freight units are relevant for planning. Each section allows users to define specific
values or ranges of values, using the logical greater than, less than, or not equal to, to provide
precise.
Time-Related Attributes: You can define the demand horizon as absolute or relative. With
absolute time periods, you define the demand horizon precisely by defining a start and end
date and a start and end time (calendar date). If using relative times, you do not define the
demand horizon with precise dates and times, but specify instead a duration starting from the
current date. The system automatically determines the start and end date and the start and
end time. If the demand horizon is not to start on the current date, you can define an offset.
Animation: Time-Related Attributes

For more information on Time-Related Attributes, please view the animation in
the lesson Selection and Planning Profiles, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
The relative demand horizon is then defined as follows:

● Start of demand horizon = current date + defined offset. The offset is made up of the offset
in days and the additional offset in hours and minutes.
● End of demand horizon = start of demand horizon + defined duration of demand horizon.
The duration of the demand horizon is made up of the duration in days and the additional
duration in hours and minutes.
Figure 116: Time-Related Attributes

If you specify a factory calendar, the system considers non-working days when calculating the
start of the horizon. In this situation, the planning horizon always begins on a working day.
You can round the horizon to full days and define the time zone to be used for this rounding.
Additional Selection Attributes: More selection criteria can be defined using additional
selection attributes. You can select objects and their fields and the criteria.
Animation: Additional Selection Attributes

For more information on Additional Selection Attributes, please view the
animation in the lesson Selection and Planning Profiles, online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Figure 118: Additional Selection Attributes

Unit 4
Exercise 9
Create a Selection Profile
Simulation: Create a Selection Profile

For more information on Create a Selection Profile, please view the simulation in
the lesson Selection and Planning Profiles online in the SAP Learning Hub.
You are working in the transportation planning department. In order to divide the planning
tasks among your colleagues, who are each responsible for the planning for different shipping
locations, you want to create several selection profiles. The selection profiles have to be set
up such that they match each planner's needs.
Note:
This exercise uses the location TMAT##-01, TMAT##-02, TMAT##-03, that you
have created in the exercise "Create Transportation Zones and Transportation
Lanes".
1. Create a new selection profile FU_SEL_## to select freight units that fulfill the following
criteria:
● The source location should be SP_1010.
● The destination locations should match pattern TMAT##*.
● Only freight units that match both mentioned geographical criteria should be selected.
● The pick-up date should be between today and 30 days into the future.
● The delivery date should be between today and 60 days into the future.

Unit 4
Solution 9
Simulation: Create a Selection Profile

For more information on Create a Selection Profile, please view the simulation in
You are working in the transportation planning department. In order to divide the planning
tasks among your colleagues, who are each responsible for the planning for different shipping
locations, you want to create several selection profiles. The selection profiles have to be set
up such that they match each planner's needs.
Note:
This exercise uses the location TMAT##-01, TMAT##-02, TMAT##-03, that you
have created in the exercise "Create Transportation Zones and Transportation
Lanes".
1. Create a new selection profile FU_SEL_## to select freight units that fulfill the following
criteria:
● The source location should be SP_1010.
● The destination locations should match pattern TMAT##*.
● Only freight units that match both mentioned geographical criteria should be selected.
● The pick-up date should be between today and 30 days into the future.
● The delivery date should be between today and 60 days into the future.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Selection Profile.
b) On the Selection Profile tab, enter the following data:
● Selection Profile: FU_SEL_##
● Description: Selection Profile User ##
c) Choose Save.
d) Choose New next to Geographical Selection Attributes.

e) In the pop-up window, enter the following data:
● Profile Name: GEO_##
● Description: Geographical Sel. User ##
f) Close the pop-up window by choosing Ok.
g) Choose New next to Time-Related Selection Attributes.
h) In the pop-up window, enter the following data:
● Profile Name: TIME_##
● Description: Time-Related Sel. User ##
i) Close the pop-up window by choosing Ok.
j) On the Time-Related Selection Attributes tab, enter the following data:
● Pick-Up in Days: 30
● Delivery in Days: 60
k) On the Geographical Selection Attributes tab, enter the following data:
● General Data - Both Locations: checked
● Source Location - Sign: Inclusive
● Source Location - Option: =
● Source Location - Lower Value: SP_1010
● Destination Location - Sign: Inclusive
● Destination Location - Option: Pattern
● Destination Location - Lower Value: TMAT##*
l) Choose Save.

Planning Profile
Planning profiles are used to influence and control the outcome of the planning process. A
planning profile must be specified for a background optimizer run as well as for interactive
planning (manual planning) in the transportation cockpit. During planning, the system
considers the settings that you make in the various planning profiles.
A user defines various settings on the planing profile, these settings determine how planning
is to be performed. Settings belonging to a certain area are grouped together, for example, all
the settings required for load planning are grouped under load planning settings. The
following figures shows the eight settings that are defined in the planning profile. All these
settings can be maintained independently and can be used for other planning profiles as well.
Figure 120: Planning Profile Settings
In addition to these settings, the following functionality is defined in the planning profile as
well:

Figure 121: Planning Profile
Animation: Planning Profile

For more information on Planning Profile , please view the animation in the
● Planning Horizon: Planning horizon defines the horizon in which new freight documents
can be created by planning. The planning horizon is defined in the planning profile in days,
hours, and minutes. The planning horizon starts at the current system time unless an
offset is defined in the planning profile. The offset can be defined in both the past and the
future.
● Default Business Document Type: The business document determination rule defines
which document types are used when freight orders and freight bookings are created
during planning. The business document determination rule is defined for each planning
profile and applies to documents created either manually or by the VSR optimizer. Freight
order type and freight booking type can be determined in the following 3 ways:
- The default type is defined in customizing
- The type is defined in the planing profile directly
- A condition can be used determine the result
● Check: The check defines the check strategy and for handling capacity violation.
● Package building profiles: The package building profile is a collection of parameters with
which you control the creation of packages. When you are doing package building based
on the capacity documents then you assign package building profile to planning profile.
The package building profile is defined in customizing.

● Parallel processing profiles: By defining parallel processing the run-time for big
optimization scenarios can be reduced. The parallel processing profile is defined in
customizing and assigned to planning profile.
Strategies: The planning profile includes settings to control the different steps of the
optimization. These steps are controlled by strategies. Strategies are made up of various
programs. If you wish to perform manual planning or a scheduled planning run, there is a
standard strategy for each function. Standard strategies are delivered by SAP. However,
unique strategies can be created using process controller.
Figure 123: Planning Strategies
Animation: Planning Strategies

For more information on Planning Strategies , please view the animation in the
1. Capacity selection settings: The capacity selection settings define which vehicle
resources, containers, drivers, and schedules are selected for transportation planning.
This setting involves selecting the resource capacity in the transportation cockpit.
Schedules are also selected based on the criteria defined in the capacity selection
settings. The mode of transportation can be maintained explicitly. Many fields in the
resource can be used for selection. A few of them are listed below:
● Location
● Equipment types
● ID
● Planning Block
● Resource owner

Note: If you use resources for which you have defined an ADR limit, VSR optimization
takes into account the number of ADR points for this resource during the optimization run.
Moreover, you can specify that resources for which you have set a planning block are not
displayed in the resource lists of the transportation cockpit.
Note: The Agreement concerning the international carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road
(ADR) is an international standard governing the transport of dangerous goods by road.
The agreement describes an exemption based on the calculation of points for dangerous
goods. If the points total calculated according to the method described does not exceed
1000 points, the exemption can be applied.
2. Optimizer Settings: Here, you can define the optimizer run-time, the maximum number of
transshipment locations and processes, and the freight order building rule, for example.
You also specify whether you require rough or detailed information for your planning
activities, define the required process controller strategy, and configure the settings for
generating transportation proposals.
SAP delivers the planning strategies VSR_DEF and VSR_1STEP as standard for the
optimization. You can use the planning strategy VSR_1STEP to control whether the
system is to perform carrier selection immediately after VSR optimization. The results of
the VSR optimization run are explained in the explanation tool.
In the advanced settings, you can also specify whether the main aim in your transportation
proposals is to ensure the lowest transportation costs possible or the shortest
transportation duration possible, based on the planned delivery date/time. You can also
define preferences in relation to your relative weighting of the variance of carriers, routes,
and departure dates, or activate or deactivate capacity constraints at transportation
mode level. You can also specify whether the system is to ignore certain settings such as
the capacity or ADR limit of a resource during VSR optimization.
VSR optimization generates a transportation plan from the optimization data consisting of
planned freight orders. It processes freight orders already available from a previous VSR
optimization run or manual planning. VSR optimization inserts the freight units into the
transportation plan and modifies these initial solutions by, for example, loading a freight
unit on to another capacity or by changing the delivery sequence of a capacity.
The optimizer tries to minimize the total costs while adhering to the constraints. At the
end of the planning run, VSR optimization returns the best solution found. You can
generate multiple alternative transportation proposals for each freight unit. You can then
choose to use one of them.
3. Load optimization settings for: Here, you can define the optimizer run-time, the planning
strategy, and various rules for load planning. For example, you can define the maximum
height difference between stacks in a row, stack height ascending in driving direction. The
standard strategy used for load optimization is ALC_DEF.
4. Constraints and costs settings: Here, you define costs related to freight units and means
of transport. In most cases, these costs are not actual costs. They simply offer a means of
controlling the result of the optimization run (for example, earliness costs and lateness
costs).
5. Incompatibility settings: Here, you define settings for your incompatibilities.
6. Carrier selection settings: Here, you specify whether the system is to use transportation
allocations or business shares. The planning strategy used for carrier selection is
TSPS_DEF. Additional strategy for cost, priority, cost+priory or cost* priority is defined.

With Cost +Priority, Carrier 1 is ranked highest.

With Cost*Priority, Carrier 2 is ranked highest.
Carrier(s) Cost Priority Cost+Priority Cost*Priority

Carrier 1 1000 20 1020 2000
Carrier 2 1100 10 1110 11000
Carrier 3 1200 30 1230 36000
7. Settings for manual planning: Here, you specify how you want the system to behave when
it assigns documents and resources:
● Assignment of documents: You use these settings to control how the system is to
assign one or more requirement documents to a capacity document.
● Removal of the assignment of documents: You use this setting to control how the
system is to remove the assignment of requirement documents to capacity
documents.
● Assignment of resources and creation of documents: You use these settings to control
how the system is to assign resources to documents and how it is to create and assign
reference documents.
● Driver Assignment: You use these settings to control how the system will assign trucks
to the drivers.
8. Scheduling Settings: You define loading and unloading durations for scheduling. The
schedule strategy defines the actions that are performed when scheduling is launched for
a freight order or freight booking in the transportation cockpit. Standard strategy used for
scheduling settings is VSS_DEF. The schedule strategy is assigned to the planning profile.
Here, we define if the system considers the dates in the freight unit as constraints and
whether a backward or forward scheduling direction is used.

Unit 4
Exercise 10
Create a Planning Profile
Simulation: Create a Planning Profile

For more information on Create a Planning Profile, please view the simulation in
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used
during transportation planning.
Note:
1. Create a planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##. Use the following data:
Area Field Value
General Data Planning Profile S4TM2-PLAN-##
Description Planning Profile ##
Planning Horizon Absolute or Relative Horizon Use Relative Horizon
Duration in Days 30
Offset Direction Future
Factory Cal. for Offs/Dur. 01

Calc
Round Horizon to Full Days Checked
Time Zone for Rounding the CET
Horizon
Default Business Document Type Determination Rule Defined per Category in
Type Planning Profile
Freight Order (Road) F2##
Booking (Ocean) BSEA
Check Check Strategy VSR_Check

Area Field Value
Take Capacities into Ac- Warning

count
2. Create a capacity selection settings CAPA-## and assign it to your planning profile
S4TM2-PLAN-##. The capacity selection settings should select the resources TM2FTL-
## and TM2LTL-## that you have created in a previous exercise.
3. Create manual planning settings MAN-PLAN-## and assign it to your planning profile
S4TM2-PLAN-##. Use manual planning strategy VSRI_SCH and the following data:
Field Value
Manual Planning Settings MAN-PLAN-##
Description Manual Planning Settings ##
Manual Planning Strategy VSRI_SCH
Document Assignment Strategy Change Capacity Document First; Insert

Missing Locations
Location Extension Strategy of Capacity Insert Location Where Distance Added to
Document Total is the Least
4. Create scheduling settings SCHEDULING-## and assign it to your planning profile S4TM2-
PLAN-##. Use scheduling strategy VSS_DEF and the following data:
Field Value
Scheduling Settings SCHEDULING-##
Description Scheduling Settings for Group ##
Scheduling Strategy VSS_DEF
Scheduling Direction Forward

Fixed Loading Duration 00:10:00
Fixed Unloading Duration 00:10:00
5. Assign the calendar resource OPEN9TO5-## to your customer location TM2G##-02 and
TM2G##-03.

Unit 4
Solution 10
Simulation: Create a Planning Profile

For more information on Create a Planning Profile, please view the simulation in
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used
during transportation planning.
Note:
1. Create a planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##. Use the following data:
Area Field Value
General Data Planning Profile S4TM2-PLAN-##
Description Planning Profile ##
Planning Horizon Absolute or Relative Horizon Use Relative Horizon
Duration in Days 30
Offset Direction Future
Factory Cal. for Offs/Dur. 01

Calc
Round Horizon to Full Days Checked
Time Zone for Rounding the CET
Horizon
Default Business Document Type Determination Rule Defined per Category in
Type Planning Profile
Freight Order (Road) F2##
Booking (Ocean) BSEA
Check Check Strategy VSR_Check

Area Field Value
Take Capacities into Ac- Warning

count
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Planning Profile.
b) Enter the data from the table.
c) Save your data.
2. Create a capacity selection settings CAPA-## and assign it to your planning profile
S4TM2-PLAN-##. The capacity selection settings should select the resources TM2FTL-
## and TM2LTL-## that you have created in a previous exercise.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Planning Profile.
b) Enter the name of your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-## and choose Continue.
c) In the Profile Assignments area of the Planning Profile, select the New link next to
Capacity Selection Settings.
d) In the pop-up window, enter the profile name CAPA-## of your capacity selection
settings and description Capacity Seletion Settings ##.
e) Close the pop-up window by choosing OK.
f) Navigate to the Capacity Selection Settings tab.
g) Enter the following data into the table for Vehicle Resources:
● Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection: RES_ID
● Sign: Inclusive
● Option: Pattern
● Lower Limit: TM2*-##
h) Save your data.
3. Create manual planning settings MAN-PLAN-## and assign it to your planning profile
S4TM2-PLAN-##. Use manual planning strategy VSRI_SCH and the following data:
Field Value
Manual Planning Settings MAN-PLAN-##
Description Manual Planning Settings ##
Manual Planning Strategy VSRI_SCH
Document Assignment Strategy Change Capacity Document First; Insert

Missing Locations
Location Extension Strategy of Capacity Insert Location Where Distance Added to
Document Total is the Least

a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Manual Planning
Settings .
c) Accept the remaining default settings.
d) Save your data.
e) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Planning Profile.
f) Enter the name of your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-## and choose Continue.
g) In the Profile Assignments area of the Planning Profile, enter the Manual Planning
SettingsMAN-PLAN-##.
h) Save your data.
4. Create scheduling settings SCHEDULING-## and assign it to your planning profile S4TM2-
PLAN-##. Use scheduling strategy VSS_DEF and the following data:
Field Value
Scheduling Settings SCHEDULING-##
Description Scheduling Settings for Group ##
Scheduling Strategy VSS_DEF
Scheduling Direction Forward

Fixed Loading Duration 00:10:00
Fixed Unloading Duration 00:10:00
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Scheduling Settings.
c) To be able to maintain the fixed loading/unloading duration, you have to proceed as

follows:
● In the Outbound tab in the Fixed Loading Duration area, chooseCreate
● Enter Loading Duration: 00:10:00
● In the Inbound tab in the Fixed Unloading Duration area, choose Create
● Enter Unloading Duration: 00:10:00
d) Save your data.
g) In the Profile Assignments area of the Planning Profile, enter the Scheduling
SettingsSCHEDULING-##.
h) Save your data.

5. Assign the calendar resource OPEN9TO5-## to your customer location TM2G##-02 and
TM2G##-03.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Define Location.
b) In the Location field, enter TM2G##-02.
c) Choose Change.
d) Navigate to the Resources tab.
e) Select the radio button for Operating Times.
f) In the Inbound field, enter OPEN9TO5-##.
g) In the Outbound field, enter OPEN9TO5-##.
h) Choose Save.
i) Repeat sub steps b to h with location TM2G##-03.
j) Leave the transaction.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 4
Lesson 3
Transportation Cockpit
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Transportation Cockpit
The transportation cockpit is the main UI for performing planning. Transportation planning,
including freight order creation, is conducted in the transportation cockpit. Transportation
requirements lists (freight unis), capacity lists (vehicle resources and schedules), order lists
and order details can be all seen in the transportation cockpit. The following are
transportation cockpit tasks:
● Manual planning
● Creation of transportation proposals
● VSR optimization
● Load planning
● Carrier selection
● Triggering of a tendering process
● Creation of delivery proposals
● Creation of freight bookings
Figure 126: Transportation Cockpit

Lesson: Transportation Cockpit
The cockpit requires users to enter several profiles that govern the content of generated
result lists. The selection profile determines what is to be planned, that is, what freight units or
freight orders are pertinent for a particular objective. The planning profile determines how the
selected freight units are planned. The capacity selection profile restricts the planning run in
relation to the transportation resources that can be used. Once the profiles have been
determined, planners can use the cockpit to create freight bookings or manage existing
freight orders.
Figure 127: Transportation Cockpit Standard Layout
The transportation cockpit is dynamic and can be configured as per users requirements. The
transportation cockpit layout offers flexible settings to control what information is presented
and the processing options available. Depending on the user requirements, certain elements
can be hidden or visible on a page. Page layouts are used to define a view the user wants to
see during planning. A page layout defines the buttons, functions, levels and hierarchies that
are displayed in the transportation cockpit, carrier selection and delivery creation application
UIs.
A combination of selection and planning profile together with a page layout can be assigned to
a profile and layout set, such that this specific planning scenario is always shown in this
layout, while another planning scenario requires another layout. Profile and layout sets are
used to distinguish between different planning areas or functions. One profile and layout set
can be assigned as the default. Such a profile and layout set is based on the specific
information requirements of a planner. For example, in one scenario, a planner has to plan
liquids on tank trucks and must be able to see the volume of product, while in another
scenario, the liquids are in barrels on pallets and the planner requires the pallet count to be
displayed. It is possible to switch between different layouts on-the-fly, for example, if a multi-
step planning process leads to different needs in each step. The following are a few examples
of different layout sets:
● A set for a planner who plans the next day
● A set for a dispatcher who makes the planning changes for today
● A set for an air and ocean planner

● A set for carrier selection

● A set for each area planner per country or region
In the standard layout, the main screen is broken up into four quadrants (views). The
maximum number of views in any layout is 6. If a user works with several screens, they can
choose a separate layout for each screen. The transportation cockpit can be deployed in
multiple windows on up to three screens. Note 2551221 provides additional information on
this topic: https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/notes/2551221.
Hierarchical view: You organize the view in the transportation cockpit by creating hierarchical
views for freight orders, freight bookings, and transportation units (trailer units, rail-car units,
container units, and package units). If you organize these business documents into
hierarchies, you can filter and sort various areas in the transportation cockpit according to
specific criteria, such as the vehicle resource. Defining hierarchical views simplifies your
rescheduling activities and the coupling and uncoupling of trailers. The following notes
provide additional information on this topic:
● 2768608
● 2182927
Maps: The map can be displayed as one screen area in the transportation cockpit or in full
screen. However, having the map displayed as one screen area enables the planner to directly
see the selected freight units, freight orders or bookings, transportation units, and resources
on the map. You can perform the following actions on the map:
● Address Search: You can use the context menu of the map to start the address search and
display the search results on the map. The address search is based on the geocoding of
the location. This allows you to perform several address searches and display the search
results simultaneously on the map. You can use the context menu of the map to hide the
search results individually or completely.
● Route Display: You can use the context menu of a connection line to determine a route
display along real street routes. This function is dependent on the geographical
information system available in the system. Alternatively, you can use the context menu of
a resource to display the connection lines of all freight orders assigned to this resource.
● Dynamic Adjustment: You can adjust the map display to meet your individual needs by
selecting the option Show Display Profile from the context menu for the map. For example,
you can specify whether map objects are to be shown or hidden, whether you want to
display the descriptions, and whether you want to allow clustering for overlapping nodes.
● Create Location and Transportation Zone: You can use the context menu for the map to
create locations and transportation zones directly on the map. The locations or
transportation zones are created where you open the context menu. However, you cannot
use the context menu to change the positioning of an object on the map.
● Proximity Search: You can use the context menu of the map to find resources as well as
unplanned freight units or transportation units that are close to a particular point on the
map.
● Resource Item: You can use the context menu of the map to specify the exact location of a
resource at any time.
● Differentiate Between Business Documents Using Colors: You can use the context menu of
the map to display different colors for multiple business documents selected

simultaneously. This enables you to better differentiate between the documents. The color
of each respective document is displayed in the Color column in the document list.
Gantt Chart: The Gantt chart is fully integrated into the transportation cockpit. The Gantt
chart is a screen area in the transportation cockpit, which can be enabled in a page layout of
the transportation cockpit. You can also update maps, generate transportation proposals,
and run optimizer planning for the selected items in the Gantt chart and in the lists and
hierarchies of the transportation cockpit. The Gantt chart has the following features:
● Transparent availability of resources and drivers: The chart panel presents you with an
overview of the availability of vehicle resources, handling resources, and drivers over time.
For example, different colors indicate whether a truck has a document assigned to it, or
whether it is traveling, in downtime, or in non-working time. You can also check whether a
handling resource is available or in downtime at a location and if a drivers is available or if
he is absent. You can use the Operating Time Calendar hierarchy to visualize the operating
time configured for a specific location. The Operating Time Calendar displays the non-
working times and activities occurring in that location. These activities are: loading,
unloading, prepare, and finalize. The hierarchy also displays the overlaps between loading
activities.
● Visibility of utilization of resources: You can display the level of consumed capacity of a
vehicle resource at a specific point in time. The system displays the utilization curve of the
selected vehicle resource in the chart panel. The tool-tip along the utilization curve
displays the loading utilization of a vehicle resource in terms of volume, weight, alternative
quantity, or normalized quantity, depending on your settings in customizing. The tool-tip
along the utilization line of a handling resource presents you with information on the
available capacity, required capacity, and over-capacity of this handling resource at a
specific point in time. You can display loading or unloading activities that are planned for a
handling resource at different times.
● Option to display or hide document separators in the Gantt chart: The Gantt chart
presents you with document separators indicating the precise document start and
document end. You can choose to display or hide document separators in the Gantt chart
by selecting the corresponding checkbox in the legend area. Document separators apply
to the resources (truck, trailer, driver, locomotive, rail-car and container).
● Option to display or hide time windows in the Gantt chart: The Gantt chart presents you
with time windows indicating when goods are to be picked up and delivered. In the Gantt
chart, time windows are shown as dotted lines and solid lines. You can choose to display
the time windows by using the corresponding check-boxes in the legend area.
● Option to display and solve warnings in the Gantt chart: The Gantt chart presents you with
warnings such as the Missing Stage warning or the Incorrect Driver Assignment warning
that are indicated by a warning icon. You can solve a warning using the context menu. You
can choose to display or hide this type of warning in the Gantt chart by selecting the
respective checkboxes in the legend. The legend area also displays the number of
warnings for each warning type. Moreover, the number is dynamically updated once a
warning of a certain type is solved or generated. Besides of the legend area, the Number of
Warnings column in the table area shows you the total number of warnings on each row in
a real-time manner. You can also deselect a certain warning type in the legend area so that
warnings of that type are not considered when calculating the total number.
● Insights into planning and execution status of documents and transportation activities: If
you transfer event-related data from SAP Event Management to SAP Transportation
Management, you can gain real-time insights into the planning status and execution status

of the documents and transportation activities in the chart panel. The statuses of
documents and activities are presented in predefined colors and patterns, as described in
the legend. Note that the Gantt chart automatically hides a legend item in the legend area if
no corresponding documents or activities are shown in the chart area.
● Flexible and dynamic switch between different views: You can switch between a single view
and a dual view (with its horizontal and vertical versions). In the chart panel of each view,
you have the option to switch between a document view and an activity view. The
dropdown lists and the related pushbuttons in the toolbar enable you to switch
dynamically between views and hierarchies that are pre-defined in Customizing. For
example, in a horizontal dual view, you can choose to display freight orders in the upper
view and trucks in the lower view, so that you can assign unplanned freight orders to trucks
using drag and drop.
● Flexible rendering of hierarchical structures: You can simplify the hierarchical structure of
document flows in Customizing so that stage documents can be directly shown under a
higher-level parent, instead of their direct parent. This provides you with more flexibility to
render document flows in the Gantt chart.
● View all objects with one click: Bird Eye provides you with the capability to have a
panoramic view of all objects with one click. With this feature turned on, the system
intelligently adjusts the zoom rate so that all items are displayed on the chart without a
need to move the horizontal scroll bar. This feature can be implemented on all rows or just
on visible rows. This can be configured in Gantt Chart customizing.
● Personalize table area appearance: You can personalize the appearance of the table area
with the following options:
- Display or hide a column
- Modify the column sequence
- Adjust the column width
Moreover, you can save all personalization settings as a variant so that the table area is
presented with the saved settings for the next time you load the Gantt chart.
● Configurable visualization of notifications: You can define the color and height of a certain
type of notifications in the Gantt chart. Moreover, you can configure when to display the
following types of notifications by specifying a utilization range value of vehicle resources:
- Empty run
- Low utilization
- Overcapacity
Transportation Cockpit Customization Settings

The following changes can be made to the layout of the transportation cockpit:
● The time zone in which to present time-related information
● Unit for distance
● The position and width of the tabs on screen
● The visibility of tabs
● The sequence and number of rows and columns visible

You can change the layout to suit your requirements by choosing the Page Layout button. For
example, you can change to a layout that displays the command line and so allows command
line planning.


Unit 4
Exercise 11
Configure a Transportation Cockpit Layout
Simulation: Configure a Transportation Cockpit Layout

For more information on Configure a Transportation Cockpit Layout, please view
the simulation in the lesson Transportation Cockpit online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Planning should be executed to a large extend interactively in the
transportation cockpit. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities
available in the transportation cockpit and its configuration.
Note:
1. Create a page layout (LAYOUT-##) for the transportation cockpit. Select the Activate
Command Line checkbox. For transportation proposals you want to use layout
TPLAYOUT_S4LG1. In the cockpit, you want to have the following pushbuttons available:
● Save
● Refresh
● Deselect All
● Update Map - All available buttons
● Assign Selected Items
● Transportation Proposals
● Optimizer Planning - All available buttons
● Explanation - Optimizer Planning
● Create Delivery Proposals
● Change Profile Selection
● Change Planning Settings

You should be able to switch between layouts TCLAYOUT_SIMPLE,

TCLAYOUT_FUNCTIONS, TCLAYOUT_VISUAL: Define the following screen areas:
Content of Top Left Area
Field Value
Requirements Area Freight Unit Stages /SCMTMS/

WDCC_PLN_FU_SHP
Width 100%
Middle Left Area

Field Value
Capacities Area Trucks

Capacities Area Schedules
Width 50%
Middle Right Area

Field Value
Orders Area Freight Orders/Freight Bookings /

SCMTMS/WDCC_PLN_FOBO
Width 50%
Bottom Left Area

Field Value
Order Details Area Carrier Ranking, Overview, Stages (/

SCMTMS/WDCC_PLN_FOROAD_STG)
Width 50%
Bottom Right Area

Field Value
Map Area Map

Width 50%
2. Create two profile and layout sets. Use the following data and select the default checkbox:
Field Value
Freight Unit Selection Profile S4TM2-SEL-##
Planning Profile S4TM2-PLAN-##
Freight Order Selection Profile S4TM2-SEL-##
Freight Booking Selection Profile S4TM2-SEL-##

Field Value
Transportation Cockpit Layout LAYOUT-##
Description Cockpit Layout for User ##
Field Value
Transportation Cockpit Layout TCLAYOUT_SIMPLE
Description Simple Layout for User ##
3. Personalize the Freight Unit Stages screen area. Add the Original Order, Original Delivery,
and Index columns. Save your variant as FU-## Stages.
4. Personalize the Trucks screen area. Add the Index column and move the Index column to
the very left. Save your variant as Vehicles-##.
5. Personalize the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area. Add the Index and Carrier
Description columns. Save your variant as FreightOrders-##.
6. Rearrange the size of the screen elements to fit your screen.
7. Maximize the Trucks screen area to review details about the selected vehicles. What is the
maximum weight of vehicles resources TM2FTL-## and TM2LTL-##? Return to your
cockpit layout.
8. Export the content of the trucks area to a spreadsheet.
9. Show the large map in the transportation cockpit with all objects. Why does your vehicle
resource appear in the Atlantic ocean to the south-west of Africa?

Unit 4
Solution 11
Simulation: Configure a Transportation Cockpit Layout

For more information on Configure a Transportation Cockpit Layout, please view
the simulation in the lesson Transportation Cockpit online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Planning should be executed to a large extend interactively in the
transportation cockpit. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities
available in the transportation cockpit and its configuration.
Note:
1. Create a page layout (LAYOUT-##) for the transportation cockpit. Select the Activate
Command Line checkbox. For transportation proposals you want to use layout
TPLAYOUT_S4LG1. In the cockpit, you want to have the following pushbuttons available:
● Save
● Refresh
● Deselect All

You should be able to switch between layouts TCLAYOUT_SIMPLE,

TCLAYOUT_FUNCTIONS, TCLAYOUT_VISUAL: Define the following screen areas:
Content of Top Left Area
Field Value
Requirements Area Freight Unit Stages /SCMTMS/

WDCC_PLN_FU_SHP
Width 100%
Middle Left Area

Field Value
Capacities Area Trucks

Capacities Area Schedules
Width 50%
Middle Right Area

Field Value
Orders Area Freight Orders/Freight Bookings /

SCMTMS/WDCC_PLN_FOBO
Width 50%
Bottom Left Area

Field Value
Order Details Area Carrier Ranking, Overview, Stages (/

SCMTMS/WDCC_PLN_FOROAD_STG)
Width 50%
Bottom Right Area

Field Value
Map Area Map

Width 50%
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Page Layouts for
Transportation Cockpit.
b) Choose New.
c) In the newly created line, enter the following data:

Field Value
Page Layout Layout-##

Field Value
Description Layout for User ##
d) Choose Actions - Details.
e) In the following screen, enter the following data:

Field Value
Transportation Proposal Layout TPLAYOUT_S4LG1
Activate Command Line Select
f) In the Page Layout Switch screen area, choose Add Entry three times and select the
page layouts TCLAYOUT_SIMPLE, TCLAYOUT_FUNCTIONS, TCLAYOUT_VISUAL.
g) Review the Pushbuttons for Application Toolbar options. Select the following
checkboxes:
● Save
● Refresh
● Deselect All
h) In the Top Left Area, choose Add Content and enter the data from the tables in the Top
Left Area tab and do not make any other changes.
i) Choose the Add Area - Below button.
j) In the Middle Left Area, choose Add Content and enter the data in the Middle Left Area
table and do not make any other changes.
k) Choose the Add Area - Right button.
l) In the Middle Right Area, choose Add Content and enter the data in the Middle Right
Area table and do not make any other changes.
m) Choose the Add Area - Below button.
n) In the Bottom Left Area, choose Add Content and enter the data in the Bottom Left

o) Choose the Add Area - Right button.
p) In the Bottom Right Area, choose Add Content and enter the data in the Bottom Right
q) Save your new page layout.
2. Create two profile and layout sets. Use the following data and select the default checkbox:
Field Value
Freight Booking Selection Profile S4TM2-SEL-##
Transportation Cockpit Layout LAYOUT-##
Description Cockpit Layout for User ##
Field Value
Transportation Cockpit Layout TCLAYOUT_SIMPLE
Description Simple Layout for User ##
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Planning → Transportation Cockpit.
b) Choose New.
c) Enter the data from the first table to create your profile and layout set.
d) Choose New.
e) Enter the data from the second table to create your profile and layout set.
f) Save your data.
g) Select your first profile and layout set and choose Continue to go to the cockpit.
3. Personalize the Freight Unit Stages screen area. Add the Original Order, Original Delivery,
and Index columns. Save your variant as FU-## Stages.
a) In the Freight Unit Stages screen area, choose Settings to show the list of available
settings.
b) Select Original Order, Original Delivery, and Index in the Columns tab.
c) Choose OK.
d) Save your variant by clicking on the dropdown menu next to Standard and select Save
As.

e) Enter the name as FU-## Stages.
f) Choose OK.
4. Personalize the Trucks screen area. Add the Index column and move the Index column to
the very left. Save your variant as Vehicles-##.
a) In the Trucks screen area, choose Settings to show the list of available settings.
b) Select Index in the Columns tab.
c) Highlight the entry Index and choose the Top button.
d) Choose OK.
e) Save your variant by clicking on the dropdown menu next to Standard and select Save
As.
f) Enter the name as Vehicles-##.
g) Choose OK.
5. Personalize the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area. Add the Index and Carrier
Description columns. Save your variant as FreightOrders-##.
a) In the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area, choose Settings to show the list of
available settings.
b) Select Index and Carrier Description in the Columns tab.
c) Choose OK.
d) Save your variant by clicking on the dropdown menu next to Standard and select Save
As.
e) Enter the name as FreightOrders—##.
f) Choose OK.
6. Rearrange the size of the screen elements to fit your screen.

a) Adjust the screen area using the ellipses button in the center at the bottom of each
screen area.
7. Maximize the Trucks screen area to review details about the selected vehicles. What is the
maximum weight of vehicles resources TM2FTL-## and TM2LTL-##? Return to your
cockpit layout.
The maximum weight of TM2FTL-## is 20000 KG and the maximum weight of TM2LTL-
## is 10000 KG.
a) In the Trucks screen area, choose Maximize.
b) Choose Minimize.
8. Export the content of the trucks area to a spreadsheet.

a) In the Trucks screen area, choose Export to Spreadsheet.
b) Review the content of the spreadsheet.
c) Close the spreadsheet and return to the transportation cockpit.

9. Show the large map in the transportation cockpit with all objects. Why does your vehicle
resource appear in the Atlantic ocean to the south-west of Africa?
Because you have not created any data yet, the only objects that are selected are your
vehicle resources TM2FTL-## and TM2LTL-##. The vehicle resources appear with
geoocoordinates of longitude 0 and latitude 0, which is in the Atlantic ocean.
a) Choose Update Map → Add All.
b) In the Map screen area, choose Maximize.
c) Choose Minimize.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 4
Learning Assessment
1. Planning is carried out on the freight unit, which must first be created. Which of the
following options can trigger the creation of a freight unit?
X A Freight Order
X B Purchase Order
X C Forwarding Order
X D Sales Order
2. Which of the following do you assign to a selection profile?

X A Geographical selection attributes
X B Capacity selection settings
X C Carrier selection settings
X D Additional selection attributes
3. Which of the following planning constraints can be considered in SAP Transportation

Management?
X A Vehicle resource capacities
X B Compartment capacities
X C Depot locations
X D Driver qualifications


UNIT 5 Interactive Transportation
Planning
Lesson 1
Performing Interactive Planning 196
Exercise 12: Create Freight Orders Interactively 203
Lesson 2
Practice Freight Order Scheduling 211
Exercise 13: Schedule Freight Orders 215
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Perform interactive planning

● Practice freight order scheduling
● Plan drivers to freight orders

Unit 5
Lesson 1
Performing Interactive Planning
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Drag and Drop Freight Order Creation

Manual planning is done in the transportation cockpit. Manual planning allows you to
manually create or change a transportation plan. To create a transportation plan, you assign
requirement documents, for example freight units, to capacities, for example vehicle
resources. The system creates capacity documents, for example freight orders, which you
can process further. For example, you can assign drivers to your freight orders or perform
load planning. If you assign freight units to a container, for example, a container unit is
created that you can directly assign to a freight booking.
Planning strategies determine the steps that the system is to carry out during the planning
process and the order in which it does so. In the planning profile, you can specify which
planning strategy you want to use. The following are a few manual planning strategies:
● VSRI_DEF for manual planning
● VSS_EMBED for embedded. This strategy does not consider scheduling constrains defined
in customizing
● VSRI_SCH for manual planning with subsequent scheduling
● VSRI_1STEP for manual planning with carrier selection
Drag and Drop Freight Order Creation:

A freight order can be created using the drag-and-drop functionality. Dragging an unplanned
freight unit stage to a resource or dragging a resource to an unplanned freight unit stage
creates a freight order. Changes to existing documents can also be made using drag and
drop. It is possible to drag additional freight unit stages to a freight order. Freight units can be
assigned from one freight document to another. Blank capacity documents can be created
(that is, capacity documents that do not contain a freight unit), which you can then process at
a later time. It is possible to drag and drop between various hierarchy levels.
The main drag and drop functionalities are as follows:
● Change relative stop sequence of a freight order or transportation unit
● Reassign stop to a different vehicle, freight order, or transportation unit
● Reschedule a freight order or transportation unit
● Assign a freight order or transportation unit to a resource (truck or trailer)

Lesson: Performing Interactive Planning
Manual planning can be done with multiple windows. The transportation cockpit can be
deployed in multiple windows on up to three screens.
● Run the transportation cockpit on multiple windows, select a separate layout for each
screen.
● Drag and drop from any list/hierarchy in one window to any other list/hierarchy.
● Actions triggered from global toolbar (for example, undo, redo, assign selected items,
update map or optimization) consider selected objects from all windows.
● A change in one window automatically updates the other windows.
Figure 129: Planning on Multiple Windows
Command Line Freight Order Creation

Command Line Freight Order Creation: The command line enables mouse-free planning and
is an alternative to drag-and-drop planning. Using the command line, the planner instructs the
system to assign freight unit stages to vehicles via a single character string.
To enable command line planning, an index is assigned to each resource and freight unit
stage. The index acts as a unique identifier for every object in the transportation cockpit. Note
that vehicle resources are assigned low numbers so that the planner can easily remember
them.
Planning with the Command Line: When planning with the command line, the planner first
enters index numbers that represent the freight unit stages, followed by a dash (-) and a
vehicle resource index. Press Enter, and a freight order is created with the relevant stages and
resource assigned. Multiple commands can be specified in one string by using a plus (+) sign
to separate them.
Example: Simple Planning of Freight Units on a Vehicle Resource
The freight units that you want to plan have the indexes 5, 6, and 7. The vehicle resource that
you want to use to transport the freight units has an index of 2. To assign the freight units to
the vehicle resource, you enter the following command in the command line: 5 6 7 — 2.
The following are prerequisites for using command line planning:

Unit 5: Interactive Transportation Planning
● The display of the command line must be activated for the page layout for the
transportation cockpit.
● The index field should be displayed for the freight unit stages and vehicles in the
The help field of the command line provides additional information. Choose More Field Help in
the context menu for the field by clicking the right mouse button.
Interactive Map Freight Order Creation

Interactive Map Freight Order Creation: Freight orders can be created using the interactive
map. Freight unit stages and vehicles are both displayed on the map.
Figure 130: Interactive Planning on the Map
You can carry out your planning activities on the map. If you select Unplanned Freight Units
and Start Planning from the context menu, for example, the system shows the possible
assignments of the freight units to the resources. Select the assignments that you require.
You can also assign unplanned freight units or multi-relations that contain unplanned freight
units to resources by using drag and drop. When you do so, you can either assign the freight
units to the resource or the resource to the freight units.
If you want to split a stage that is displayed on the map, you can assign an unplanned freight
unit or multi-relation to a location using drag and drop. Once you have selected the required
planning option, the system adds the selected location to the freight unit stage and updates
the map accordingly. This process also applies to freight orders.
You can also display transshipment locations that are not part of your planning activities. You
display these locations by choosing Show Related Transshipment Locations from the context
menu.
If a freight order does not have a vehicle assigned to it, you can also assign the vehicle using
drag and drop. To do so, you assign the freight order to a single vehicle resource or a multi-
spot that contains at least one vehicle resource or passive vehicle resource and then select
the relevant planning option from the menu.

The system displays all of your transportation planning activities on the map. When you leave
the full display of the map, your planning activities are also displayed in the table view of the
Interactive Planning on the Map: You can carry out your planning on the map.
● If you select Unplanned Freight Units and Start Planning from the context menu, for
example, the system shows the possible assignments of the freight units to the resources.
Select the assignments that you require.
● You can also assign unplanned freight units or multi-relations that contain unplanned
freight units to resources by using drag and drop. When you do so, you can either assign
the freight units to the resource or the resource to the freight units. You can use the
proximity search in the context menu to find unplanned freight units and transportation
units that are within a specific radius of a resource or a location.
● If you want to split a stage that is displayed on the map, you can assign an unplanned
freight unit or multi-relation to a location using drag and drop. Once you have selected the
required planning option, the system adds the selected location to the freight unit stage
and updates the map accordingly. This process also applies to freight orders.
● You can also display transshipment locations that are not part of your currently selected
planning activities. You display these locations by choosing Show Assigned Transshipment
Locations from the context menu.
● In the context menu for a freight unit, you can add locations.
● If a freight order does not have a vehicle assigned to it, you can also assign the vehicle by
using drag and drop. To do so, you assign the freight order to a single vehicle resource or a
multi-spot that contains at least one vehicle resource or passive vehicle resource and
select the relevant planning option from the menu. You can use the proximity search in the
context menu to find available resources that are within a specific radius. You can also
specify the exact position of a resource at any time in the context menu of the map.
● In the case of resources on the map, you can find the assigned business documents by
selecting the corresponding option from the context menu for the resource. The system
searches for already planned freight orders and adds these to the map.
● You can use the context menu of the map to display different colors for multiple business
documents selected simultaneously. This enables you to better differentiate between the
documents. The color of each respective document is displayed in the Color column in the
document list.
● The system displays all of your transportation planning activities on the map. When you
leave the display of the map, your planning activities are also displayed in the table view of
the transportation cockpit.
Gantt Chart Freight Order Creation

Using a Gantt chart, which is often used in project planning as well, helps to visualize the
availability of resources and the sequential order of transports. The Gantt chart is fully
integrated into the transportation cockpit.
In the Gantt chart, freight orders and vehicle resources are displayed as a time bar and
planners can manually plan transports by using drag and drop. The Gantt chart is a screen
area in the transportation cockpit which can be enabled in a page layout for transportation
cockpits. All standard functionalities, like positioning the Gantt chart anywhere on the
transportation cockpit or maximizing the screen area to full screen, are available for the Gantt
chart too.

A zoom bar on top of the screen area can zoom in and out to see a more detailed view of a day
or week, or a more general view of the year.
Figure 131: Gantt Chart: Display of Resources and Documents
An important factor for transportation planning is the utilization of a vehicle. The utilization of
the vehicle can be displayed with the utilization view, which can be enabled when needed. The
utilization view shows the utilization of the vehicle over time in a graph. The graph is displayed
in a detail line below the actual resource or document. In this case, the single-view is chosen.
This enables the user to see all of the execution information within one screen. Multiple
loading acts are only displayed as one item in the Gantt chart. This keeps the chart clean and
easy to understand.
Interactive planning can be performed in the Gantt chart using drag and drop. Unplanned
freight orders can be assigned to resources. Likewise, resources can be assigned to freight
orders. The freight order is dropped on the time bar of the resource. If the freight order is not
dropped at the same date it was originally planned, the date where it was dropped is taken
over into the freight order. Scheduling is only performed when requested using the Scheduling
button on top of the Gantt chart. The dual-view can be selected to have the unplanned freight
orders displayed on top and the available resources below. This enables the user to work with
one window to plan freight orders. The dual-view can either be displayed horizontally or
vertically. The size of each area can be changed by dragging with the mouse.

Figure 132: Gantt Chart: Interactivity and Planning Scenarios
The Gantt chart enables the planning of unplanned freight orders by dragging on vehicle
resources, as well as the creation of transportation units. When dragging and dropping the
loading activity of one freight order into the time bar of another freight order, both freight
orders are combined.
Overlap means the resource was planned multiple times and is therefore not executable. For
example, if the trailer is already planned and newly planned in a later step, this would cause an
overlap which the user gets displayed as a red line.
Similar to the utilization view, an overlap view shows if several documents on a resource
overlap. This overlap can be overcome by scheduling the resource.


Unit 5
Exercise 12
Create Freight Orders Interactively
Simulation: Create Freight Orders Interactively

For more information on Create Freight Orders Interactively, please view the
simulation in the lesson Performing Interactive Planning online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities
available in SAP TM to the client’s transportation planner.
Note:
1. Create several sales orders so that you have data for planning. Take note of the sales
order numbers that you create. Use the following data:
Field Value
Order Type ZTM2
Sales Org 1010
Distribution Channel 10
Division 00
Sold-to TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0

Party 1 1 2 2 3 3
PO Num- TM-## TM-## TM-## TM-## TM-## TM-##

ber
Material TM- TM- TM- TM- TM- TM-
MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01
Quantity 1 6 2 5 3 4

Sales Or-
der Num-
ber
2. Enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile and selection profiles for freight
units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data:
Field Value
Selection Profile for Freight Units S4TM2-SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Orders S4TM2-SEL-##
Layout LAYOUT-##
3. Perform manual planning with TM2FTL-## using drag and drop functionality on your
freight units to TM2G##-01.
4. Confirm that a freight order with a temporary freight order number has been created in
the order area.
5. Review the freight order in the Overview screen area. Can you explain the durations that
have been calculated and that are shown?
6. Perform manual planning with TM2FTL-## on your first freight unit to TM2G##-02 using
the command line. Enter the index number of the first freight unit to TM2G##-02, the
character - (minus) and the index number of TM2FTL-##. For example, 5–1.
7. Confirm that a freight order has been created in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings
screen area with a temporary freight order number.
9. To perform manual planning using the interactive map, select one of your freight units to
customer TM2G##-03, one of the freight orders to TM2G##-01 or TM2G##-02 and the
vehicles TM2LTL-## and TM2FTL-##. Assign the freight unit to the existing freight order.
10. Can you explain the planning results?
11. Switch to the layout TCLAYOUT_VISUAL and plan one unplanned freight unit to
TM2G##-02 on vehicle TM2FTL-## in the Gantt chart screen area after having maximized
this area.

12. Remove any overlaps (if they exist for vehicle TM2FTL-##) by dragging and dropping
freight orders in the Gantt view.
Why are overlaps allowed in this case?
13. Save your planning result.

Unit 5
Solution 12
Create Freight Orders Interactively
Simulation: Create Freight Orders Interactively

For more information on Create Freight Orders Interactively, please view the
simulation in the lesson Performing Interactive Planning online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Business Example
Note:
1. Create several sales orders so that you have data for planning. Take note of the sales
order numbers that you create. Use the following data:
Field Value
Order Type ZTM2
Sales Org 1010
Distribution Channel 10
Division 00
Sold-to TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0 TM2G##-0

Party 1 1 2 2 3 3
PO Num- TM-## TM-## TM-## TM-## TM-## TM-##

ber
Material TM- TM- TM- TM- TM- TM-
MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01 MAT-01
Quantity 1 6 2 5 3 4

Sales Or-
der Num-
ber
● Division: 00
c) Choose Continue.
d) Enter the data from the first column of the table:
● Sold-to-Party: see table
● Order Quantity: see table
e) Choose Save.
f) Repeat steps d and e with the other columns from the table.
g) Note your sales order number each time.
units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data:
Field Value
Layout LAYOUT-##
b) Select the row with the relevant entries from the table above.
c) Choose Continue.
3. Perform manual planning with TM2FTL-## using drag and drop functionality on your
freight units to TM2G##-01.
a) Select the two freight units to TM2G##-01.
b) Drag the freight units to vehicle resource TM2FTL-## and drop the freight unit on the
resource.

4. Confirm that a freight order with a temporary freight order number has been created in
the order area.
a) A freight order with a temporary freight order number has been created on the
resource.
In the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area, select the temporary freight order
and choose Actions → Details. The freight order will be displayed in the Details section
(lower left screen area). Select the Overview and choose Maximize. The duration is
approximately 4 hours. In the row for the shipping point, you will find the Start of Activity
and End of Activity. The difference is the loading duration (10 minutes). You also find the
departure time in this row. In the row for the customer, you will find the Start of Activity
and End of Activity. The difference is the unloading duration (10 minutes). You also find
the arrival time in this row. The difference between departure and arrival is the transport
duration. All times have been calculated according to the settings that you have
configured in planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##. Exact distances and duration may vary
based on GIS setup.
6. Perform manual planning with TM2FTL-## on your first freight unit to TM2G##-02 using
the command line. Enter the index number of the first freight unit to TM2G##-02, the
character - (minus) and the index number of TM2FTL-##. For example, 5–1.
7. Confirm that a freight order has been created in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings
screen area with a temporary freight order number.
a) A freight order with a temporary number has been created in the Freight Orders/
Freight Bookings screen area.
and choose Actions → Details. The freight order will be displayed in the Details sections
(lower left screen area). Select the Overview and choose Maximize. The duration is
approximately 4 hours. In the row for the shipping point, you will find the Start of Activity
and End of Activity. The difference is the loading duration (10 minutes). You also find the
departure time in this row. In the row for the customer, you will find the Start of Activity
and End of Activity. The difference is the unloading duration (10 minutes). You also find
the arrival time in this row. The difference between departure and arrival is the transport
duration. All times have been calculated according to the settings that you have
configured in planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##. Exact distances and duration may vary
based on GIS setup.
9. To perform manual planning using the interactive map, select one of your freight units to
customer TM2G##-03, one of the freight orders to TM2G##-01 or TM2G##-02 and the
vehicles TM2LTL-## and TM2FTL-##. Assign the freight unit to the existing freight order.
a) Select the freight unit to TM2G##-03 in the Freight Unit Stages screen area.
b) Select the freight order to TM2G##-02 in the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen
area.

c) Select vehicles TM2LTL-## and TM2FTL-## in the Trucks screen area.
d) Choose Update Map → Add Selected Entries.
e) Maximize the map area.
f) To show the geography of the selected items in more detail, drill into Germany.
g) Select the freight unit to TM2G##-03 and right-click to display the context menu.
h) Select Start Planning to display the planning options.
i) Choose one planning option, for example, Assign freight unit stage to freight order
stage $2.
j) Choose OK
k) Minimize the map area.
10. Can you explain the planning results?
and choose Actions → Details. The freight order will be displayed in the Details section
(lower left screen area). Select the Overview and choose Maximize. You will notice that a
freight order with two stages has been created. The first stage starts at shipping point
SP_1010. The stages end at the two customers that are being part of this freight order:
TM2G##-03 and TM2G##-02.
a) In the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area, select your freight order.
11. Switch to the layout TCLAYOUT_VISUAL and plan one unplanned freight unit to
TM2G##-02 on vehicle TM2FTL-## in the Gantt chart screen area after having maximized
this area.
a) In the Page Layout button, select TCLAYOUT_VISUAL.
b) In the Gantt Chart area, choose the Maximize button.
c) Select Freight Units and Trucks in the Gantt Chart area.
d) Drag and drop a freight unit to TM2G##-02 to vehicle resource TM2FTL-## .
12. Remove any overlaps (if they exist for vehicle TM2FTL-##) by dragging and dropping
freight orders in the Gantt view.
Why are overlaps allowed in this case?
Overlaps are allowed because TM2FTL-## resources are defined as multi resources.
a) In the Trucks part of the screen, drag and drop freight orders so that they do not
overlap.
13. Save your planning result.

a) Choose Save.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 5
Lesson 2
Practice Freight Order Scheduling
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Scheduling
Scheduling determines start and end times for a set of dates and times such as the departure
and arrival of a freight order, the pick-up and delivery of the assigned freight units, or the
coupling and uncoupling of trailers. In scheduling, the system considers multiple constraints
like a predefined relative ordering among the activities of the freight order as well as the pick-
up windows and the delivery windows of the assigned freight units. Scheduling can be
triggered for one or more selected freight orders and is based on your settings in the planning
profile.
Freight Order Scheduling
The scheduling of freight orders can be initiated in the following ways:
● From the transportation cockpit using the Scheduling button

● From the freight order user interface using the Scheduling button
● Automatically, by entering the departure date of a freight order and choosing Enter on
your keyboard (if the user parameter /SCMTMS/SCH_FORCE is active)
Scheduling considers the following constraints:
● Time windows for loading and unloading activities for your freight units
● Appointments for the freight order to which your freight units are assigned
● Loading and unloading durations of your freight units
● Location sequence of your freight order
● Existing freight orders on resources
● Coupling and uncoupling durations
● Calendar resources as well as the calendars and capacities for the loading and unloading
activities of handling resources
● Calendars of the involved vehicle resources for loading, unloading, transportation,
coupling, and uncoupling activities

Scheduling Unplanned Requirement Documents

You can quickly generate the approximate transportation time for requirement documents
without needing to plan the documents. In addition, the Gantt chart can display the stage
sequence to provide a useful visual aid.
There are multiple ways to schedule an unplanned requirement document, as follows:
● Applying a default route to the document
● Choosing Schedule
● Starting the freight unit building process
You can view the scheduling results on the Gantt chart and in the requirement document.
After scheduling, the requirement document contains the transportation times for each stage
(planned arrival and planned departure times) but the document is still unplanned.
Forward and Backward Scheduling
Figure 134: Forward Scheduling
The following example illustrates the use of forward scheduling.

Customer A orders 50 pallets of product X and asks for a delivery date in three weeks.
Currently, the capacity of your depot is 100 m³. Product X takes up 95 m³ of your depot.
Therefore, you decide to move the goods out of your depot as soon as possible in order to
minimize your inventory. That is why you decide to use forward scheduling.
Figure 135: Backward Scheduling
Customer B orders 50 pallets of product Y and asks for a delivery date in three weeks.
Currently, the capacity of your depot is 100 m³. Product Y takes up 5 m³ of your depot.
Therefore, you decide to stick to the delivery time window as closely as possible. That is why
you decide to use backward scheduling.

Lesson: Practice Freight Order Scheduling
Scheduling Constraints and Settings
Figure 136: Scheduling Constraints
You can use the scheduling constraints function to consider constraints for scheduling during
VSR optimization. This allows VSR optimization to, for example, extend the transportation
plans for long trip durations so that a driver can take his required breaks. This function only
applies to vehicle resources. For example, a truck requires two days for a trip from the east
coast to the west coast of the United States. However, since the driver must take breaks
along the way, a longer trip duration must be scheduled.
Resource Availability
Resource availability is considered for the following resources:
● Vehicle resources
● Calendar resources
● Handling resources
Resource Availability Considerations

Resource availability considers the following:
● Factory calendar
● Capacity variants
● Downtimes
● Existing activities assigned to the resource
Scheduling Strategy
Scheduling strategies are assigned in the scheduling settings in the planning profile. The
standard strategy is VSS_DEF. In the scheduling settings, you can specify the forward/
backward scheduling direction and maintain coupling/uncoupling durations.


Unit 5
Exercise 13
Schedule Freight Orders
Simulation: Schedule Freight Orders

For more information on Schedule Freight Orders, please view the simulation in
the lesson Practice Freight Order Scheduling online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
Note:
1. Check that scheduling constraints S4TM2 are assigned to means of transport TM2-FTL.
units and freight orders. Use transportation cockpit layout TCLAYOUT-SIMPLE. Use the
following data:
Field Value
Layout TCLAYOUT-SIMPLE
3. Remove the planning result from the previous exercise for your freight units to customer
TM2G##-03
4. Use forward scheduling and manually create a freight order for one of your freight units to
TM2G##-03 with vehicle TM2FTL-##.
5. What is the departure date and time (loading time) at SP_1010 and what is the arrival date
and time (unloading time) at TM2G##-03?

6. Use forward scheduling and manually create a freight order for the second freight unit to
TM2G##-03 with vehicle TM2FTL-##. But this time, ignore the scheduling constraints.
and time (unloading time) at TM2G##-03? Why is it different now?
8. Schedule the freight order from the previous step again, but consider scheduling
constraints and use backward scheduling this time.
10. Can you explain the difference between the backward, forward, and consideration of
scheduling constraints?

Unit 5
Solution 13
Schedule Freight Orders
Simulation: Schedule Freight Orders

For more information on Schedule Freight Orders, please view the simulation in
the lesson Practice Freight Order Scheduling online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
Note:
1. Check that scheduling constraints S4TM2 are assigned to means of transport TM2-FTL.
b) In Customizing for TM, choose Transportation Management → Planning → General

Settings → Define Scheduling Constraints.
c) Choose Means-of-Transport Constraints in the navigation pane.
d) Check that the following entry exists:

Field Value
Constraint Set ID S4TM2
e) Leave the customizing.
following data:
Field Value

Field Value
c) Choose Continue.
3. Remove the planning result from the previous exercise for your freight units to customer
TM2G##-03
a) In the Freight Unit Stages screen area, select the freight units to TM2G##-03.
b) Choose the Remove Capacity Document button.
c) Choose Save.
4. Use forward scheduling and manually create a freight order for one of your freight units to
TM2G##-03 with vehicle TM2FTL-##.
a) Select one freight unit to customer TM2G##-03.
b) Select the vehicle resource TM2FTL-##.
c) Choose Assign Selected Items.
Note your departure and arrival times. These will vary.
a) Select the freight order in the Road Freight Orders screen area and review the exact
scheduling in the Stages screen area by choosing Actions - Show Details.
6. Use forward scheduling and manually create a freight order for the second freight unit to
TM2G##-03 with vehicle TM2FTL-##. But this time, ignore the scheduling constraints.
a) Choose Change Planning Settings.
b) Select the Ignore Scheduling Constraints checkbox.
c) Close the pop-up window by selecting OK.
d) Select the unplanned freight unit to customer TM2G##-03.
e) Select the vehicle resource TM2FTL-##.
f) Choose Assign Selected Items.
and time (unloading time) at TM2G##-03? Why is it different now?
It is different now because in the previous step, the scheduling included the scheduling
constraints, while they are ignored in this freight order.

a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area and review
the exact scheduling in the Stages screen area by choosing Actions - Show Details.
b) Make a note of the pick-up and delivery times.
8. Schedule the freight order from the previous step again, but consider scheduling
constraints and use backward scheduling this time.
a) Choose Change Planning Settings.
b) Deselect the Ignore Scheduling Constraints checkbox.
c) Change the scheduling direction from Forward to Backward.
d) Close the pop-up window by selecting OK.
e) Select the second freight order to customer TM2G##-03.
f) Choose Scheduling.
Note that the pick-up and delivery times vary. It is different now because in the previous
step, the scheduling has been done forward from the pick-up date and time, while in this
step, it is done backward from the delivery date and time. If the freight unit does not have
a defined end date at the delivery location, the scheduling is done backward from the
planning horizon. It is different now because in the previous step, the scheduling is
forward and ignoring the scheduling constraints, while in this step, it is backward and also
considers scheduling constraints.
a) Highlight the freight order in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area and
review the exact scheduling in the Stages screen area by choosing Actions - Show
Details.
10. Can you explain the difference between the backward, forward, and consideration of
scheduling constraints?
Backward scheduling schedules from the delivery window into the past. Forward
scheduling schedules from the pick-up window into the future. When scheduling
constraints are considered, the duration for transportation activities is extended by the
approximate break time that truck drivers must take.

Driver Management
A driver is any person who can operate vehicles and perform transportation-related tasks as a
result of certain qualifications. Drivers are no longer maintained as resources but are defined
as business partners. Drivers can get assigned to existing freight orders and vehicle
resources. It is also possible to create freight orders to which the system assigns drivers
automatically as soon as they are created. This function is available only for road freight
orders and trucks.
One or more drivers can be assigned to an existing freight order or to the individual
transportation stages of an existing freight order. In a driver team, the individual drivers take
turns to drive. The person who is not driving sleeps.
A prerequisite of this process is that drivers are created as business partners with business
partner role TM Labor Resource. The following are the properties of the driver:
● Home location
● Org unit
● Validity period
● Absences (for example, sickness, vacation)
● Non-working times (for example, Monday – Friday)
● Offered qualifications
● Last planned location and availability time
Figure 138: Business Partner: Driver

Animation: Business Partner: Driver

For more information on Business Partner: Driver , please view the animation in
the lesson Practice Freight Order Scheduling , online in the SAP Learning Hub.
In freight order customizing, you can define the following settings related to drivers:
● Settings can be changed in freight order
● Number of required drivers
● Driver assignment type
In the manual planning settings, you can define default truck handling settings. This defines
how the default truck of a driver is considered when assigning a driver to a freight order. You
can ignore the default truck or use the default truck if no other truck is assigned to the freight
order.
Figure 140: Driver Freight Order Assignment
Automatic Assignment of Drivers

Automatic assignment of drivers to freight orders happens if the driver assignment is
requested via the freight order type and the driver is assigned to the resource master data of
the vehicle resource as default driver. Other than that, manual assignment of drivers is
possible in the transportation cockpit as follows:
● Drag and Drop: It is possible to drag and drop drivers from the list of drivers in the
transportation cockpit to the freight order being planned in the road freight order
hierarchy or in the road freight order list. If it has been specified in the freight order type
that drivers have to be assigned per transportation stage, it is possible to drag and drop
drivers in the road freight order hierarchy to the individual transportation stages.

● Manual creation and change: It is possible to enter or change drivers manually in the Driver
column in the road freight order hierarchy or in the road freight order list. If specified in the
freight order type that drivers have to be assigned per transportation stage, it is possible
to enter or change drivers for individual transportation stages in the Driver column in the
road freight order hierarchy. If driver assignment has been activated in the order details
area in the layout for the transportation cockpit, it is possible to select a freight order in the
road freight order hierarchy or in the road freight order list and manually enter or change a
driver in the details for this freight order.
● Dialog box: Finally, it is possible to select a freight order in the road freight order hierarchy
or in the road freight order list and choose the Assign Driver pushbutton. A dialog box
appears in which drivers can be entered. Then, the user can decide in the dialog box
whether to replace the currently assigned drivers with new drivers or whether to add
drivers to the existing drivers.

LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 5
Learning Assessment
1. What visual elements support planning in the transportation cockpit?

X A Analytics
X B Map
X C Gantt Chart
X D Load Plan
2. Which of the following statements are correct?

X A Several freight units can be assigned to a freight order.
X B One freight unit can be assigned to several freight orders.
X C One freight unit stage can be assigned to multiple freight orders.
3. Which of the following statements is correct?

X A Drivers are business partners
X B Drivers are resources


UNIT 6 Automatic Transportation
Planning
Lesson 1
Plan with the VSR Optimizer 228
Exercise 14: Configure and Execute VSR Optimization 237
Exercise 15: Analyse the VSR Explanation Log 249
Lesson 2
Plan via Hubs 260
Exercise 16: Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation Proposals 265
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand VSR optimization

● Execute VSR optimization
● Explain the VSR optimizer result
● Configure a planning scenario with hubs
● Configure and execute transportation proposals

Unit 6
Lesson 1
Plan with the VSR Optimizer
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Vehicle Scheduling and Routing Optimizer

The vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers routing, and the sequence in
which resources arrive at certain locations (as well as the scheduling of tasks running in
parallel). It evaluates potential changes to the routing and the effect such changes would have
on scheduling, helping to avoid the possibility of delayed deliveries and follow-on costs.
The goal of the optimizer is to assign freight units to vehicles/resources and determine the
route and sequence of freight units per vehicle/resource such that all constraints are met and
total costs are minimized. The optimizer achieves this goal by evolutionary local search, a
population-based meta-heuristic that borrows selection principles from evolutionary
algorithms and relies heavily on local optimization.
Figure 141: Mathematical Model
The transformation displayed in the figure is obviously a reduction of the driven distance.

Lesson: Plan with the VSR Optimizer
Costs and Constraints

The total cost, which the optimizer is designed to minimize, is a weighted sum of the following
items:
● Non-delivery/execution penalty (per freight unit (FU))
● Earliness and lateness penalty (per FU)
● Fixed cost (per vehicle or tour)
● Travel-dependent costs (per vehicle), for example, distance and duration.
● Load-dependent costs (per vehicle and tour)
● Sustainability costs, such as CO2 emissions
VSR Optimization Costs

Fixed costs are calculated once by the system for each capacity used in the VSR optimization
run. Capacities include vehicle resources and schedules. For schedules, the fixed costs are
incurred per departure.
In addition to fixed costs, other variable costs can be applied. The following are the variable
transportation costs per unit for the following dimensions:
● Duration
● Distance
● Transported quantity per distance
● Intermediate stop
These costs refer to the use of the dimensions of a capacity, including empty runs, during the
VSR optimization run.
Duration and Distance Costs

You can define the costs per duration for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a
maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do
not specify a unit, the system measures duration in seconds.
You can define the costs per distance for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a
maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do
not specify a unit, the system measures distance in kilometers. You can also specify the cost
basis. This determines if the system uses the costs per distance from the costs per distance
field in the planning profile or from the transportation lane. Alternatively, you can specify that
the system is to take the sum of both values into account. When optimizing for destination-
based distance costs, you have to define distance cost in the transportation lane.
Transported Quantity per Distance and Intermediate Stop Costs

You can define the costs per quantity for each VSR optimization run. You must also define a
unit. You cannot define a maximum value for the costs per quantity. However, you can specify
if the system is to use the costs per quantity from the transportation lane or from the costs
per quantity specified in the planning profile.
For costs per quantity from the transportation lane, you can specify if the system is to
calculate the costs in a distance-independent way or if it is to multiply them by the distance.

Unit 6: Automatic Transportation Planning
Figure 142: Quantity and Distance
For costs per quantity from the planning costs, you can specify if the system is to calculate
the costs in a distance-independent way per transportation lane or if it is to multiply them by
the distance. The system determines the costs per stage if costs are calculated in a distance-
independent way. You are not allowed to define a unit. If multiplying by the distance, the
system uses the fixed value that you have defined in the costs per quantity field.
Animation: Quantity and Distance

For more information on Quantity and Distance, please view the animation in the
lesson Plan with the VSR Optimizer, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
You can define the maximum number of intermediate stops and the costs per additional stop.

Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
Figure 144: Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
The figure, Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost, illustrates the route-based and
destination-based costs as follows:
● Destination-based cost:
- Freight order (A → B → C) = Distance (A → B → C) * Cost (A → C) = 300 * 1.5 = $450.
- Freight order (A → C → B)
= Distance (A → C → B) * Cost (A → B) = 250 * 1.9 = $475.
● Route-based cost:
- Freight order (A → B → C) = Distance (A → B) * Cost (A → B) + Distance (B → C) *
Cost (B → C) = 200 * 1.9 + 100 * 1.8 = $560.
- Freight order (A → C → B) = Distance (A → C) * Cost (A → C) + Distance (C → B) *
Cost (C → B) = 150 * 1.5 + 100 * 1.8 = $405.
Route-based and destination-based distance costs can yield different results. In North
America, destination-based distance cost calculation is used frequently, whereas in Europe,
route-based distance costs are primarily used.
Optimizer Considerations
The goal of the VSR optimizer is freight unit consolidation and the creation of a cost effective
and timely route from source to destination.
VSR Goals and Objectives
● Goal: Determine a transportation plan that minimizes total costs and satisfies all
constraints.
● Decisions:

- Per freight unit: Transport or not?

- Per transported freight unit: Select path through transportation network (stages).
- Per selected stage: Select capacity or vehicle resource.
- Per capacity or vehicle resource:
■ Select relative ordering of activities (= routing).
■ Assign start time to each activity (= scheduling).
● Total costs = sum of:
- Penalty costs (non-delivery, earliness, or lateness).
- Capacity or vehicle costs (fixed, duration, stops, quantity, and distance).
The total cost is the sum of penalty costs for non delivery, early and late delivery, and vehicle
costs for duration, distance, stops, and quantity.
Optimizer Constraints
Figure 145: Optimizer Constraints
The optimizer operates within the constraints defined in the figure, Optimizer Constraints.
The optimizer evaluates any changes in routing caused by constraints for their effect on the
scheduling and timing. It communicates any change of time or date to all tasks on that
resource or to any dependent tasks on any other resource. Considering both aspects in
parallel ensures effective planning.
The optimizer tries to assign freight units to vehicles and determine an effective delivery order
for each vehicle so that total transportation costs are minimized. It considers several
constraints and takes penalty costs into account as part of the total transportation cost.
The following penalty costs are defined in the planning profile and can be used to control the
decisions made by VSR optimization:
● Premature pick-up
● Delayed pick-up

● Premature delivery
● Delayed delivery
The optimizer calculates additional costs if the transportation plan deviates from the
requested pickup and delivery dates. This is done when using soft constraints in the pickup
and delivery time window and defining penalty costs in the planning profile.
There is a balance in the optimizer process between selecting the cheapest mode of transport
and adhering to promised delivery dates and defined pickup dates. For example, the optimizer
could decide to ship via an intermodal means of transport even if this means delivering a day
late. This is on the condition that savings made by selecting a slower means of transport
outweigh the penalty costs for delayed delivery.
Penalty Costs
Figure 146: VSR Optimization Window
The penalty cost for premature pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls
between the earliest pickup time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature pickup (soft
constraint).
The penalty cost for delayed pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls between
the allowed late pickup time (soft constraint) and the latest pickup time (hard constraint).
The penalty cost for premature delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls
between the earliest delivery time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature delivery time
(soft constraint).
The penalty cost for delayed delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls
between the allowed late delivery time (soft constraint) and the latest delivery time (hard
constraint).

Pickup and Delivery Window Definition

Defining Pickup and Delivery Windows
● Forwarding orders, SAP ERP-orders, and deliveries work only with single day and time for
pick up and delivery.
● To allow more flexibility for freight consolidation and routing optimization SAP TM
Planning uses Time Windows.
● Combination of pick up and delivery definition and penalty costs controls how the
optimizer schedules within the time window.
Windows control when goods are to be picked up and delivered. VSR optimization schedules
the pickup or delivery exactly in the window defined. If there were no windows, VSR
optimization would schedule these dates to minimize the total costs.
You can also control the optimization when windows are not taken into account and goods are
picked up or delivered too early or too late.
Defining Tolerances
You can create windows by defining tolerances within which a premature or delayed pickup or
delivery is to be allowed. You specify for each tolerance if VSR optimization is to consider it a
hard, soft, or hard and soft constraint. Specifying constraints controls if VSR optimization
calculates penalty costs when the constraints are not adhered to.
The following tolerances can be defined:
● Maximum earliness
● Maximum delay
● Delay without penalty costs
● Earliness without penalty costs
The dates and times defined for the pickup and delivery in the freight unit are the basis for
calculating the tolerances. The exact time for the pick-up date or delivery date can be
considered.
Hard and Soft Constraints

Conditions are used to set up pickup and delivery windows. The condition is specified in the
freight unit type.
Window Constraints
● None
● Hard (acceptable dates)
● Soft (requested dates)
● Hard and soft (both)
VSR optimization takes constraints into account when it assigns freight units to capacities.
You can differentiate between hard and soft constraints:
● VSR optimization always adheres to hard constraints.

● You model soft constraints using penalty costs, for example, lateness costs that are part of
the total costs.
The following are the relevant condition types:

● For pick up and delivery time window definition: /SCMTMS/TOR_TIMEWIND
● For earliness and lateness cost definition: /SCMTMS/FU_PNLT_COST
Means of Transport Cost Evaluation

Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to
use. For example, a break-even analysis between a large truck and a small truck can be
modeled with this setting.
There is a relation between pickup and delivery penalty time and cost per duration. Depending
on business rules, it could be better to delay pickup or deliver early.
The maximum distance and durations are useful for deciding on rail or air transport instead of
road. The maximum number of stops and costs are useful for reducing the number of visits
during a week at customers or suppliers.
Stop Off Costs

The figure, Stop Off Costs, shows two stop-offs between locations A and D. Stopover costs
are applied to influence the outcome of VSR optimization. The source and target location in a
route are not taken into account when calculating the number of stopovers. Maintain the
number of stopovers plus one.


Unit 6
Exercise 14
Configure and Execute VSR Optimization
Simulation: Configure and Execute VSR Optimization

For more information on Configure and Execute VSR Optimization, please view
the simulation in the lesson Plan with the VSR Optimizer online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to configure and execute
the VSR Optimizer for automating planning processes to the client’s transportation planner.
Note:
1. Create optimizer settings S4TM2-OPT-## and assign it to your planning profile S4TM2-
PLAN-##. Use planning strategy VSR_DEF and the following data:
Field Value
Manual Planning Settings S4TM2-OPT-##
Description Optimizer Settings ##
Planning Strategy VSR_DEF
FO Building Rule New Freight Order when Resource is Empty

Maximum Runtime 20 seconds
Automatic Runtime Regulation Not used
2. Create constraints and cost settings S4TM2-COST-## with the following values, and
assign them to your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##:
Table 16: Planning Cost Settings

Field Value
Constraints and Costs Settings S4TM2-COST-##
Description Constraints and Cost Settings ##

Field Value
Earliness/Delay Costs Basis Earliness/Delay Costs Defined in Planning

Costs
Costs for Non-Delivery 999.999.999,00 (if not already defined)
Costs for Earliness per Day 1,00
Costs for Lateness per Day 1,00
Currency EUR
3. In the Means-of-Transport Settings screen area of your Constraints and Costs Settings
S4TM2-COST-##, maintain the costs for your means-of-transport TM2-FTL and TM2-LTL
using the following data:
Table 17: Means-of-Transport Settings 1

Field Value
Consider Distance Cost from Planning Cost Yes

Settings
Consider Distance Cost from Transporta- No
tion Lane
Fixed Costs per Capacity Document 10
Fixed Costs per Vehicle Resource 5

Settings
tion Lane
4. Select the row for means of transport TM2-FTL. Enter the following data in the Means-of-
Transport Setting Details tab:

Field Value
Premature Pick-Up 1,0
Delayed Pick-Up 1,0
Premature Delivery 1,0
Delayed Delivery 1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs No Costs

Field Value
Costs per Intermediate Stop 50
Maximum Number of Intermediate Stops 4
Distance Cost Basis from Lane Route-based

Costs per Distance Unit 1
5. Select the row for means of transport TM2-LTL. Enter the following data in the Means-of-

Field Value
Delayed Pick-Up 1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs Planning Costs: Distance Independent


Costs per Quantity 0,05
Unit of Measure KG
following data:
Field Value
7. Remove the planning result from the previous exercise for your freight units to customers
TM2G##-01, TM2G##-02, and TM2G##-03.
8. Create a freight order for the freight unit with volume 1,5 m3 to TM2G##-03 using the
optimizer planning function, with all available resources. Analyze the result, but do not
save.

9. Review the details of the freight order in the Overview tab. Answer the following questions
before refreshing the transaction: How many freight orders are created? Which resource
has been used? What is the duration of the transport?
10. Create a freight order(s) for all six freight units to customers TM2G##-01, TM2G##-02,
and TM2G##-03 using the optimizer planning function, with all available resources.
Analyze the result, but do not save.
has been used? What is the duration of the transport? What is the maximum utilization?
and TM2G##-03 using the optimizer planning function, with only resources TM2LTL-##.
13. Review the details of the freight orders in the Overview tab. Answer the following questions
14. Can you explain the optimization results?

Unit 6
Solution 14
Simulation: Configure and Execute VSR Optimization

For more information on Configure and Execute VSR Optimization, please view
the simulation in the lesson Plan with the VSR Optimizer online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
Business Example
the VSR Optimizer for automating planning processes to the client’s transportation planner.
Note:
1. Create optimizer settings S4TM2-OPT-## and assign it to your planning profile S4TM2-
PLAN-##. Use planning strategy VSR_DEF and the following data:
Field Value
Manual Planning Settings S4TM2-OPT-##
Description Optimizer Settings ##
Planning Strategy VSR_DEF
FO Building Rule New Freight Order when Resource is Empty

Maximum Runtime 20 seconds
Automatic Runtime Regulation Not used
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Optimizer Settings.
d) Save your data.

g) In the Profile Assignments area of the Planning Profile, enter the Optimizer Settings
S4TM2-OPT-##.
h) Save your data.
2. Create constraints and cost settings S4TM2-COST-## with the following values, and
assign them to your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##:
Table 16: Planning Cost Settings

Field Value
Constraints and Costs Settings S4TM2-COST-##
Description Constraints and Cost Settings ##
Earliness/Delay Costs Basis Earliness/Delay Costs Defined in Planning

Costs
Costs for Non-Delivery 999.999.999,00 (if not already defined)
Costs for Earliness per Day 1,00
Costs for Lateness per Day 1,00
Currency EUR
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Constraints and Costs
Settings.
d) Save your data.
g) In the Profile Assignments area of the Planning Profile, enter the Constraints and Cost
SettingsS4TM2-COST-##.
h) Save your data.
3. In the Means-of-Transport Settings screen area of your Constraints and Costs Settings
S4TM2-COST-##, maintain the costs for your means-of-transport TM2-FTL and TM2-LTL
using the following data:

Field Value

Settings

Field Value

tion Lane

Settings
tion Lane
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Constraints and Costs
Settings.
b) In the Constraints and Costs Settings field, enter S4TM2-COST-##.
c) Choose Continue.
d) In the Means-of-Transport Settings, choose the Createbutton twice.
e) Enter the data from the Means-of-Transport 1 table.
4. Select the row for means of transport TM2-FTL. Enter the following data in the Means-of-

Field Value
Delayed Pick-Up 1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs No Costs

Costs per Intermediate Stop 50

Costs per Distance Unit 1
a) Enter the data from the Means-of-Transport Settings 2 table.
b) Save your data.

5. Select the row for means of transport TM2-LTL. Enter the following data in the Means-of-

Field Value
Delayed Pick-Up 1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs Planning Costs: Distance Independent


Costs per Quantity 0,05
Unit of Measure KG
a) Enter the data from the Means-of-Transport Settings 3 table.
b) Save your data.
following data:
Field Value
c) Choose Continue.
7. Remove the planning result from the previous exercise for your freight units to customers
TM2G##-01, TM2G##-02, and TM2G##-03.
a) In the Freight Unit Stages screen area, select the freight units to customers
TM2G##-01, TM2G##-02, and TM2G##-03.
c) Choose Save.
8. Create a freight order for the freight unit with volume 1,5 m3 to TM2G##-03 using the
optimizer planning function, with all available resources. Analyze the result, but do not
save.

a) Select the freight unit with volume 1,5 m3 to TM2G##-03 in the Freight Unit Stages
screen area.
b) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries with All Resources.
has been used? What is the duration of the transport?
One freight order is created. It uses resource TM2-LTL-## and the duration is
approximately 1 day (loading: 10 minutes, transportation: 24h, unloading: 10 minutes).
a) In the Road Freight Orders tab, select the new freight order ($1) by choosing
Actions → Show Details.
b) Review the details of the freight order in the Overview screen area.
c) Choose Refresh to return to the previous state.
a) Select all six freight units to customers TM2G##-01, TM2G##-02, and TM2G##-03 in
the Freight Unit Stages screen area.
One freight order is created. It uses resource TM2-FTL-## and the duration is
approximately 6 hours (loading: 10 minutes, transportation: approx. 5,5h, unloading: 3
times 10 minutes). The maximum utilization is 72%.
a) In the Road Freight Orders tab, select the new freight order ($2) by choosing
and TM2G##-03 using the optimizer planning function, with only resources TM2LTL-##.
b) Select truck TM2LTL-## in the Trucks screen area.
c) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries Only.

Three freight orders are created (one for each destination). All of them use resource TM2-
LTL-## and the duration is approximately 1 day (loading: 10 minutes, transportation: 24h,
unloading: 10 minutes) for each. The maximum utilization is 48%.
a) In the Road Freight Orders tab, select the new freight orders ($3, $4 or $5) by
choosing Actions → Show Details.
14. Can you explain the optimization results?
The optimization results can be explained as follows: If only one freight unit gets
optimized, vehicle resource TM2LTL-## is the cheapest choice. If all freight units get
optimized, the best choice is to consolidate all of them into one tour for vehicle resource
TM2FTL-##. If all freight units are optimized with vehicle resource TM2LTL-## only, three
freight orders are created, because no multi-stop freight orders are allowed for resource
TM2LTL-##.

Explanation Tool
You set user parameter /SCMTMS/EXP to X to allow for the logging of the optimizer data for
optimization runs that you start interactively.
Figure 148: Activate Explanation Protocol
Animation: Activate Explanation Protocol

For more information on Activate Explanation Protocol, please view the
animation in the lesson Plan with the VSR Optimizer, online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
The explanation tool for VSR optimization displays the following information:
● Input for the VSR optimization run
● Results of the VSR optimization run
● Solution overview
Content of the Optimizer Planning Log / Explanation Protocol Input
● Freight units
● Transportation documents
● Freight bookings
● Resources
● Transportation network
● Incompatibilities
● Conditions

● Dimensions
● Parameters
Results
● Freight units
● Transportation documents
● Freight bookings
● Solution details
● Resources

Unit 6
Exercise 15
Analyse the VSR Explanation Log
Simulation: Analyse the VSR Explanation Log

For more information on Analyse the VSR Explanation Log, please view the
simulation in the lesson Plan with the VSR Optimizer online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to understand and analyze
the VSR Optimizer result to the client’s transportation planner.
Note:
1. Analyze the three optimization runs using the Optimization Explanation function to
understand why the optimizer creates the results. Identify the optimization runs of the
previous exercise.
2. Use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results.
3. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the first run (with freight unit to
TM2G##-03)?
4. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Freight Unit, Resources, and
Transportation Network folders.
5. What is the gross weight of the freight unit?

6. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for TM2-LTL?
7. In the MTR Costs folder, what is the unit cost for the TM2-LTL in the MTR Variable Costs
table?
8. What is the total cost?
9. Exit the screen.
10. On the RCCF: Log Display screen, use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results
for the second run (freight units to all customers using TM2-FTL).
11. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the second run (with freight units to all
customers using TM2-FTL)?
12. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Resources and Transportation
Network folders.
13. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for TM2-FTL?
14. In the MTR costs folder, what is the stop-off cost?
15. What is the distance cost for TM2-FTL?

16. In the Solution Details folder, choose Solution Details. What is the distance in the Tr. Dist.
field?
18. Exit the screen.
for the third run (freight units to all customers using TM2-LTL).
20. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the third run (freight units to all
customers using TM2-LTL)?
22. What is the gross weight of all freight units?
table?

26. If you select all freight units, but do not specify the vehicle resource to be used, what is the
result?
27. Change the fixed costs in Constraints and Costs Settings S4TM2-COST-## for TM2-FTL to
500. That will change the result of optimization run 2.
following data:
Field Value
31. Change the fixed costs in Constraints and Costs Settings S4TM2-COST-## for TM2-FTL
back to 5. That will change the result of optimization run 2.

Unit 6
Solution 15
Simulation: Analyse the VSR Explanation Log

For more information on Analyse the VSR Explanation Log, please view the
simulation in the lesson Plan with the VSR Optimizer online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to understand and analyze
the VSR Optimizer result to the client’s transportation planner.
Note:
1. Analyze the three optimization runs using the Optimization Explanation function to
understand why the optimizer creates the results. Identify the optimization runs of the
previous exercise.
a) In the backend system, enter the transaction code RCC_LOG and filter by user name.
b) On the RCCF: Log Display screen, choose .
c) In the Define Filter Criteria dialog box, select User Name in the Column Set column and
use the arrows to move it to the Filter Criteria column to filter by user name.
d) Choose Define Values.
e) Enter your user name for the filter criteria (S4TM2-##).
f) Choose Enter.
2. Use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results.

a) Select the earliest row with the optimization run.
b) Choose Explanation Tool.
c) Choose Result → Solution Details → Solution Costs: Overview.

3. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the first run (with freight unit to
TM2G##-03)?
The total cost can vary. The total cost is approximately 106,75 and consists of the
following elements: Fixed cost is 4 (Solution costs: Assignment costs, =costs for TM2-LTL
per capacity document: 3 and per vehicle resource: 1) and the quantity cost is 102,75
(Solution Costs: Routing Costs. Quantity cost for TM2-LTL 0,05 per kg * 2055 kg).
a) Choose Results → Solution Details → Solution costs: Assignment costs.
b) Choose Results → Solution Details → Solution Costs: Routing Costs.
5. What is the gross weight of the freight unit?
The gross weight of the freight unit is 2055 kg.
a) Choose Input → Freight Units → Freight Units.
The fixed cost is defined as 1. You have defined the fixed cost in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Fix Costs and Penalty Factors.
table?
The unit cost you defined in the planning cost settings is 0,05 per KG.
a) Choose Input Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Cost.
The total cost is 1 + 3 + 2055 * 0,05 = 1 + 3 + 102,75 = 106,75. However, with the additional
consideration of earliness and lateness, this may vary at different times of the day.
9. Exit the screen.
for the second run (freight units to all customers using TM2-FTL).
a) Select the second row with the optimization run.
d) Review the Solution Costs: Overview table.

11. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the second run (with freight units to all
customers using TM2-FTL)?
The total cost is approximately 436,89. However, the cost may be different in your
system. The total costs consists of the following elements: Fixed cost is 15 (Solution costs:
Assignment costs, =costs for TM2-LTL per capacity document: 10 and per vehicle
resource: 5) and the distance cost is 321,89 (Solution Costs: Routing Costs. Distance cost
for TM2-FTL 1 per km * 321,89 km; the distance and therefore distance cost may vary due
to GIS settings ) and stopp off cost is 100 (Solution Costs: Routing Costs. cost per
additional stop for TM2-FTL 50 * 2).
a) Choose Results → Solution Details → Solution costs: Assignment costs.
b) Choose Results → Solution Details → Solution Costs: Routing Costs.
12. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Resources and Transportation
Network folders.
13. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for TM2-FTL?
The fixed cost for TM2-FTL is defined as 5. You defined this in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Input → Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Fix Costs and Penalty Factors.
14. In the MTR costs folder, what is the stop-off cost?
The stop-off cost is 50. You defined this in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Input → Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Costs.
15. What is the distance cost for TM2-FTL?
1 per km.
a) Choose Input → Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Costs.
16. In the Solution Details folder, choose Solution Details. What is the distance in the Tr. Dist.
field?
The total transportation distance is 321,89. However, the distance may be different based
on your GIS settings.
a) Choose Result → Solution Details → Solution Details.

The total cost is 5 + 10 + 2 * 50 + 321,89* 1 = 5 + 10 + 100 + 321,89 = 436,89. However,

with the additional consideration of earliness and lateness, this may vary at different times
of the day.
18. Exit the screen.
for the third run (freight units to all customers using TM2-LTL).
a) Select the first row with the optimization run.
20. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the third run (freight units to all
customers using TM2-LTL)?
The total cost is approximately 729,25. However, with the additional consideration of
earliness and lateness, this may vary at different times of the day.
22. What is the gross weight of all freight units?
The gross weight of all freight units is 14385 kg (685+4110+1370+3425+2055+2740).
a) Choose Input → Freight Units → Freight Units.
The fixed cost is defined as 1.You defined it in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Fix Costs and Penalty Factors.
table?
The unit cost you defined in the planning cost settings is 0,05 per KG.
a) Choose Input Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Cost.
The total cost is 1+ 3*3 + 14385*0,05) = 1 + 9 + 719,25 = 729,25. Any remaining value may
come from the earliness/lateness (Solution Costs: Scheduling Costs).

26. If you select all freight units, but do not specify the vehicle resource to be used, what is the
result?
One freight orders using TM2-FTL will be the result, because this is the cheaper variant
according to the current system setup (optimization run 2).
27. Change the fixed costs in Constraints and Costs Settings S4TM2-COST-## for TM2-FTL to
500. That will change the result of optimization run 2.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Constraints and Costs
Settings .
c) Choose Continue.
d) Change the fixed costs (per capacity document) for TM2-FTL to 500.
e) Save your data.
following data:
Field Value
c) Choose Continue.
Three freight orders are created (one for each destination). All of them use resource TM2-
LTL-## and the duration is approximately 1 day (loading: 10 minutes, transportation: 24h,
unloading: 10 minutes) for each. The maximum utilization is 48%.

a) In the Road Freight Orders tab, select the new freight orders ($3, $4 or $5) by
choosing Actions → Show Details.
31. Change the fixed costs in Constraints and Costs Settings S4TM2-COST-## for TM2-FTL
back to 5. That will change the result of optimization run 2.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Constraints and Costs
Settings.
c) Choose Continue.
d) Change the fixed costs (per capacity document) for TM2-FTL to 5.
e) Save your data.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 6
Lesson 2
Plan via Hubs
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Pooled Distribution
In the pooled distribution process, the SAP SAP TM system determines whether it is more
cost-effective to deliver freight directly to the customer via truckload or using a pool location
to consolidate freight.
Figure 151: Scenarios
In the pool distribution process, a shipper wants to send goods from a shipping point to
customers using pool or hub locations for consolidation.
Animation: Scenarios
For more information on Scenarios , please view the animation in the lesson Plan
via Hubs, online in the SAP Learning Hub.

Lesson: Plan via Hubs
The following figure lists master-data objects that are required. All the master data concepts
are covered in Unit 2. We will revise transshipment locations here as they are important for
this concept.
Figure 153: Master Data
Figure 154: Transshipment Locations
Animation: Transshipment Locations

For more information on Transshipment Locations, please view the animation in
the lesson Plan via Hubs, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Definition of a Transshipment Location: A transshipment location is defined by assigning a

location to either another location or to a transportation zone. When you assign a

transshipment location to a transportation zone, it can be used as a transshipment location

by all locations that are part of that transportation zone.
A transshipment location is used for unloading goods from one vehicle resource and loading it
onto another vehicle resource during the transportation process. Transshipment locations
are used when different means of transport or different carriers have to be used in the
transportation process. You can also use transshipment locations when consolidating or de-
consolidating goods to be transported.
If you define a transshipment location and want to use it in your transportation processes, you
must define transportation lanes that take the transshipment location into consideration.
Multi-Stage Transportation
The VSR optimizer evaluates the various possibilities for transporting the selected freight
units. It then opts for pooled distribution whenever it is cost-effective to do so. In a standard
pooled distribution process, the VSR optimizer creates one freight order to transport the
cargo to the transshipment location. It then creates a second freight order to transport the
cargo out of the transshipment location.
Other scenarios are also possible. Multiple freight orders allow splitting up of resource
assignment, carrier assignment, and other downstream planning and execution activities.
Transportation Proposals
A transportation proposal defines how a freight unit can be transported through a
transportation network (which is defined by locations, transshipment locations,
transportation zones, transportation lanes, vehicle resources, schedules, and bookings). For a
given transportation demand (freight unit), the system determines a set of alternative
transportation proposals. The transportation proposal functionality serves the following
purposes:
● To help the user identify the different transportation options for a freight unit. In a complex
network, in which end-to-end transportation requires several stages, transportation
proposals are an easy way to make the different options transparent. Transportation
proposals can differ in relation to routing, means of transport, and time required. Each of
these variables can increase or reduce costs, and the proposals thus provide the planner
responsible with the necessary information to make an appropriate choice.
● To create the stages upfront, for example, to choose the option of ocean transport,
because the customer has placed their order well in advance and this is the cheapest
choice. In this use case, no freight orders are created based on the proposal result, but
only the stage information is stored. This allows the task of planning the different stages to
be assigned to different planners and to be completed at different times.

Figure 156: Visualization Of Transportation Proposals
Entry Points for Transportation Proposal Determination

The entry points for transportation proposal determination are as follows:
● Forwarding Order → Stages → Actual Route → Define Route
● Transportation Cockpit → Select Freight Unit(s) → Transportation Proposal
Layout of the Transportation Proposal Result

The layout of the transportation proposal result screen can be flexibly configured, similar to
the transportation cockpit layout. The results can be displayed in a table format or visualized
on a map. If the transportation proposal has been carried out for several freight units
(because these compete for the same capacity, for example), the solution is always for a valid
combination of assignments. In the table-based layout, each stage is shown in a separate line.
In complex networks, there could be millions of routing options for a given transport, with only
minor differences between them. Depending on the objective of the planner, results can be
presented according to defined criteria.
Transportation Proposal: User-Defined Preferences
● Route variation
● Carrier variation
● Departure date variation
● Time relevance
● Cost variance
Preferences can be weighed against each other on the basis of relevance: none, low, medium,
or high.
When you use the optimizer to generate a transportation proposal, you can specify whether
the system is to accept only the proposed route or the proposed route and associated freight
documents. In this field, you have the following options:
● Save Route Only: Only the freight unit stages are saved when the system accepts the route
that you have chosen.

● Save Route and Freight Documents: Freight unit stages and freight documents are saved
by the system.
● Not Defined: You can specify on a case-by-case basis whether the system is to save only
freight unit stages or also the associated freight documents.
Features of the Transportation Proposal

The features of the transportation proposal are as follows:
● Implicit definition of transshipment locations by schedules and freight bookings (simplified
definition of transportation network)
● Mode of transport constraints on freight unit and freight unit stage level
● Fast determination of transportation proposals, yielding more alternatives according to
predefined variation criteria (for example, route, carrier, and departure date), and trade-off
between time and cost (controlled variation according to pre-defined criteria)
● Consideration of preferences for locations, carrier, mode of transport, dates, and times
● Display of multiple solutions on the result map
● Rough planning (detailed planning on the main leg and rough planning for pre leg and
subsequent leg, based on rough definition of transportation durations)

Unit 6
Exercise 16
Configure, Execute, and Analyze
Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation Proposals
Simulation: Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation Proposals

For more information on Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation
Proposals, please view the simulation in the lesson Plan via Hubs online in the
SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
the Transportation Proposal for automating planning processes to the client’s transportation
planner.
Note:
1. Change optimizer settings S4TM2-OPT-## in such a way that maximal 10 transportation

proposals are created and planning strategy VSR_DEF is used.
following data:
Field Value
3. Only required if you have saved the planning result in a previous exercise: Remove the
planning result from the previous exercise for your freight unit to customer TM2G##-01
with gross volume 3 M3.
4. Add vehicle resource TM2POOL-00 to your selection.

5. Create a transportation proposal for the freight unit with volume 3 m3 to TM2G##-01.
6. How many transportation proposals are created?
7. Which option has the longest duration?
8. Analyze the transportation proposals using the Optimization Explanation function to

understand why the optimizer creates the results. Identify the transportation proposal run
from the previous step.
9. Use the Explanation Tool to view the transportation proposal result.
10. How can you differentiate the four different proposals?
11. How can you identify which solution ID (Sol. ID) corresponds to which proposal?

Unit 6
Solution 16
Configure, Execute, and Analyze
Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation Proposals
Simulation: Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation Proposals

For more information on Configure, Execute, and Analyze Transportation
Proposals, please view the simulation in the lesson Plan via Hubs online in the
SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
the Transportation Proposal for automating planning processes to the client’s transportation
planner.
Note:
1. Change optimizer settings S4TM2-OPT-## in such a way that maximal 10 transportation

proposals are created and planning strategy VSR_DEF is used.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Optimizer Settings.
b) In the Optimizer Settings field, enter S4TM2-OPT-##.
c) Choose Continue.
d) In the Planning Strategy for Transp. Prop. field, enter VSR_DEF.
e) In the Max. Number of Trans Proposals field, enter 10.
f) Save your data.
following data:
Field Value

Field Value
c) Choose Continue.
3. Only required if you have saved the planning result in a previous exercise: Remove the
planning result from the previous exercise for your freight unit to customer TM2G##-01
a) In the Freight Unit Stages screen area, select the freight unit to customer TM2G##-01
c) Choose Save.
4. Add vehicle resource TM2POOL-00 to your selection.

a) In the Trucks screen area, choose Insert.
b) In the pop-up window, enter TM2POOL-00 and choose OK.
5. Create a transportation proposal for the freight unit with volume 3 m3 to TM2G##-01.
a) Select the freight unit with volume 3 m3 to TM2G##-01 in the Freight Unit Stages
screen area.
b) Choose Transportation Proposals.
6. How many transportation proposals are created?
Four different transportation proposals are shown with different costs and routings.
Option 1: SP_1010 to TMCD-HANNOVER using TM2-POOL and continuing to TM2G##-01
using TM2-FTL. Option 2: SP_1010 to TMCD-HANNOVER using TM2-FTL and continuing
to TM2G##-01 using TM2-FTL. Option 3: SP_1010 direct to TM2G##-01 using TM2-FTL.
Option 4: SP_1010 direct to TM2G##-01 using TM2-LTL.
7. Which option has the longest duration?
The direct option from SP_1010 to TM2G##-01 using TM2-LTL has the longest
transportation duration (24:00 hours).
8. Analyze the transportation proposals using the Optimization Explanation function to

understand why the optimizer creates the results. Identify the transportation proposal run
from the previous step.
a) In the backend system, enter the transaction code RCC_LOG and filter by user name.
b) On the RCCF: Log Display screen, choose .

c) In the Define Filter Criteria dialog box, select User Name in the Column Set column and
use the arrows to move it to the Filter Criteria column to filter by user name.
d) Choose Define Values.
e) Enter your user name for the filter criteria (S4TM2-##).
f) Choose Enter.
9. Use the Explanation Tool to view the transportation proposal result.

a) Select the row with entry TVRG in the column Appl.
10. How can you differentiate the four different proposals?
Each proposal has a different Sol. ID and different costs.
a) Choose Results → Solution Details → Solution costs: Overview.
11. How can you identify which solution ID (Sol. ID) corresponds to which proposal?
You can identify which solution ID (Sol. ID) corresponds to which proposal by comparing
the transportation proposals in the transportation cockpit with the freight orders per Sol.
ID.
a) Choose Results → Freight Orders → Freight Orders.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 6
Learning Assessment
1. A user parameter needs to be set to activate explanation protocol.

X True
X False
2. Which of the following items is not a constraint considered by the VSR optimizer?
X A Vehicle capacity
X B Driver experience
X C Handling resources
X D Depot location
3. What information does the explanation tool for VSR optimization display?
X A Input for the VSR optimization run
X B Solution details
X C Results of the VSR optimization run
X D Solution overview
4. A transshipment location allows you to change the means-of-transport.

X True
X False

5. Which of the following can be expressed as preferences for a transportation proposal?

X A Route variation
X B Departure date variation
X C Driver preference
X D Incompatibilities

UNIT 7 Subcontracting, Load Planning,
and Short-Cut-Process
Lesson 1
Carrier Selection 274
Exercise 17: Execute Carrier Selection 287
Lesson 2
Load Planning 295
Exercise 18: Configure and Execute Load Planning 301
Lesson 3
Short-Cut Process 309
Exercise 19: Configure and Execute the Short-Cut Process 311
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Define transportation allocations and business shares

● Subcontract freight orders
● Configure the load planning process
● Understand, configure, and execute the short-cut process

Unit 7
Lesson 1
Carrier Selection
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Carrier Selection
Figure 158: Overview Document Flow
Once a freight order has been built, a shipper needs to choose (and communicate with) the
business partner responsible for moving the product. We will refer to this as carrier selection.
The carrier is the business partner that you subcontract the freight order to. The carrier can
be different from the executing carrier, which is another business partner role that you can
assign to your freight order, if the carrier itself subcontracts the execution of the freight order
to a third party. That way, you have the option to differentiate between the party you
contracted with and the party actually executing the freight move.

Lesson: Carrier Selection
Carrier Selection
Carrier selection is used to assign a suitable carrier to your sub-contractable business
documents (for example, freight orders), either manually or automatically. Carrier selection
can be done for freight bookings and also via report /SCMTMS/PLN_OPT. The aim is to find a
carrier with the lowest costs under consideration of the defined constraints.
In manual carrier selection, you manually assign the required carrier to your business
documents. If you have configured a check against transportation allocations, the system
takes this into account and checks transportation capacities (transportation allocations) that
you have defined for the individual carriers. If, during the allocation, the system finds relevant
transportation allocations without capacity or that certain rules are violated by the allocation,
warning messages appear. When you want to take business shares into account for carrier
selection that you have to define this in the transportation lane and carrier selection settings.
A separate optimization is available for automatic carrier selection. It takes selected
optimization options into account when determining the most cost-effective carrier for all
business documents that you have selected. If none of the carriers are available, the system
does not assign any carrier to the relevant business documents.
Animation: Carrier Selection Process Flow

For more information on Carrier Selection Process Flow, please view the
animation in the lesson Carrier Selection, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Figure 160: Carrier Selection Process Flow

Unit 7: Subcontracting, Load Planning, and Short-Cut-Process
Status Management in Subcontracting
Figure 161: Status Management in Subcontracting
The figure shows which statuses change during the subcontracting process.
Strategy Options
During planning in SAP TM, strategies are defined which are optimization options for carrier
selection. The system takes these strategies into account during the automatic carrier
selection process.
You define strategies either in the transportation lane or in carrier selection settings. Initially,
the system considers the appropriate transportation lane for each freight order. This allows it
to consider different settings in one run. Taking strategies and settings into consideration, the
optimizer then creates a carrier ranking list containing the different carrier options. The
strategy options supported are as follows:
● Cost and Priority
● Business Share
● Transportation Allocation
● Continuous Move
Costs and Priorities in Carrier Selection

In carrying out carrier selection, the system can put more weight on priorities or costs.
Penalty costs can influence business shares and continuous moves.
In terms of priority, the system can determine the most favorable carrier based on the
priorities you have defined. In effect, this means that the system chooses the carrier with the
highest priority, while taking into account the various restrictions that may be in place.
Alternatively, the system can determine the carrier on the basis of lowest total cost. Costs in
this case can refer to internal costs or to charges calculated in charge management. carrier
reliability can be taken into account e.g. by using the BCV to review the reliability manually in a
manual process or by using the “cost+priority” selection and model as bonus in automatic
process.

Note:
When we speak of internal costs here, we are not speaking of real-world costs.
Internal costs are used for weighting only, as part of the carrier selection process.
Transportation Allocations
Transportation allocations allow companies to assign defined quantities of capacity to certain
business partners. This includes set minimum or maximum capacity restrictions that regulate
how much business is allowed with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of
transport. A separate business object is used to model these allocations.
Often, firm relationships exist with carriers in the form of contracts. These contracts can
guarantee that an amount of business is allocated to a carrier, which if not met, results in
penalties. SAP TM has the tools to track these relationships or, alternatively, divide up
business between different carriers.
An allocation represents the planned capacities for a carrier and a trade lane during a validity
period. The capacities can be defined for multiple dimensions, such as volume, weight, and
20-foot equivalent units, as well as a sequence of time periods of the same granularity, which
are frequently called (time) buckets. For each dimension and time period, the allocation
captures the already-consumed portion of the maintained capacity. All freight documents
matching the carrier, trade lane, and validity period consume the corresponding buckets of
the allocation. As soon as a freight document is created, the matching allocations are
determined asynchronously and updated according to the freight document’s capacity. The
consumed quantities are visible in the allocations and allow tracking of the capacities and
their utilizations.
The following are examples of transport allocations:
● A carrier commits to at least 25 shipments or truckloads from Nashville each day.
However, for business reasons, the availability changes each day.
● A carrier normally provides two trucks per day from Dayton, Ohio. For business reasons,
the carrier is able to offer, on Tuesday and Friday only, five trucks to the shipper.
● A carrier can include additional capacity to the existing number of shipments by truck. For
example, a carrier could add five additional trucks during the week between Tuesday and
Thursday.
Carrier capacity can be defined for any geographical level in arbitrary dimension. When
defining the allocation, the trade lane can be specified as follows:
● Along: Both source location/zone and destination location/zone can be specified
● From: Source location/zone only
● Within: Using zone hierarchy
● To: Destination location/zone only
● Inbound: Destination zone is specified
● Outbound: Source zone is specified
Extended carrier selection optimizer interface

● During carrier selection either using optimizer or manual planning, the allocation can be
checked
● During tendering, the allocation can be checked
Figure 162: Transportation Allocation
Creation of Transportation Allocations:

When you create a transportation allocation, you define the following:
Creation options: You can specify, for example, whether a transportation allocation is to refer
to a transportation lane and whether time buckets may be overwritten.
Scope of transportation allocation: Here you enter, for example, the planning period (yearly,
weekly, and so on). You are free to choose the start of the planning period. For example, you
can define a bucket from Monday 14:00 until Tuesday 14:00.
Buckets: Here you can define, for example, a sub-bucket distribution. If a carrier can only
deliver, for example, in the morning, you can define two sub-buckets (Morning and Afternoon)
for the bucket Daily. As the percentage of the assigned business documents (for example,
freight orders), you define 100% for Morning and 0% for Afternoon. In addition, you can
specify the minimum and maximum product allocation quantity.
SAP Transportation Management distinguishes between the following three transportation
allocation types:
● Air freight agreement allocation
Stores information about transportation allocations of carriers that act as constraints for
air freight agreements. You can create air freight agreement allocations directly from an
air freight agreement.
● Carrier selection allocation
Stores information about transportation allocations of carriers in a specific trade lane. The
system uses carrier selection allocations when optimizing the carrier selection.
● Flight schedule-based allocation

Stores information about transportation allocations of carriers at schedule departure level

in a master flight schedule. You can create flight schedule-based allocations directly from
a master flight schedule.
Figure 163: Allocation Types
Animation: Allocation Types

For more information on Allocation Types, please view the animation in the
lesson Carrier Selection, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
In Customizing, you can follow the menu path Transportation

Management → Planning → General Settings → Define Transportation Allocation Types and
define allocation types by specifying the following parameters:
● Default Type: If you created an allocation from scratch and did not choose an allocation
type, the default allocation type is chosen; it’s set by this parameter.
● Mode of Transport: You can define the mode of transport or omit this field.
● Planning Period: You can choose among daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly, and
schedule departure. Whereas the first considers all freight documents in the specified time
period, the last option refers to departures of an underlying schedule. This means that all
freight documents created for that departure are covered by the bucket.
● Schedule-Based Allocation: This specifies that the allocation depends on a schedule – that
is, you can create the allocation only out of a schedule.
● Full Calendar Units:You can define whether the bucket fully covers a calendar unit or if it
can start at any time but has a duration according to the planning period. If you use a daily
planning period and do not use full calendar units, you can have a planning period from
Monday at 8:00 until Tuesday at 8:00. If you use a monthly planning period and full
calendar units, the bucket starts at 0:00 on the first day of the month and lasts until 0:00
on the first day of the next month.

● Use Attributes: This allows you to create multiple buckets for the same period of time. The
buckets consider different attribute combinations based on shipping type, contract basis,
or handling code. Using handling codes for the upper deck and lower deck of an airplane,
you can define two buckets with individual capacities, one for the upper deck and one for
the lower deck.
● Use Carrier Selection: This defines whether allocations of this type are considered by
carrier selection.
● Carrier Selection Unit of Measure: If carrier selection is activated, you can specify the
allocation’s unit of measure that is considered for carrier selection. You may define
allocations with volume, weight, and TEU quantities and choose carrier selection
considering the TEU capacities.
● Update Quantity Automatically: This defines whether a newly created allocation or bucket
gets an automatic update of its consumed quantities.
● Bucket Overlapping: A freight document may cover multiple buckets of the allocation.
Using this parameter, you can define whether all covered buckets get consumed by the
freight document or only the first covered bucket gets consumed. This parameter should
not be changed if allocations already exist in your productive system because the buckets
will contain data according to both consumption modes, which makes the quantities hard
to interpret.
● BW Relevance: This specifies whether the allocation type is relevant for analytics based on
SAP Business Warehouse (SAP BW).
Business Shares
Selecting Carriers Based on Business Share
Figure 165: Selecting Carriers Based on Business Shares
The objectives of business shares are as follows:

● Assign defined percentages to certain business partners
● Support negotiation of freight agreements
● Avoid dependency on a single vendor
● Consider the capacity of a carrier for a certain relation/route/geography

Animation: Selecting Carriers Based on Business Shares

For more information on Selecting Carriers Based on Business Shares, please
view the animation in the lesson Carrier Selection, online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Like transportation allocations, business shares make use of trade lanes. With SAP TM, you
can define such target shares per carrier as a business share for a trade lane and means of
transport or mode of transport on a daily, weekly, monthly,quarterly, or yearly basis.
Business Share (Example)
Figure 167: Selecting Carriers Based on BS and Transportation Allocation
When defining the business share context, you create the business share buckets. The
percentage of business share a carrier can have for these individual buckets is the actual
business share a carrier is allowed to have. There are different types of bucket available
during business share creation. They are yearly, quarterly, monthly, weekly, and daily.
Example One
Carrier A can have a weekly bucket of 75% of the business share on the lane between
Hamburg and Frankfurt between the validity periods March 1 2015 to 31 May 2015. In the
same context, Carrier B can have a weekly bucket of 25% defined.

Figure 168: Business Share Tolerances and Penalty Costs
Animation: Business Share Tolerances and Penalty Costs

For more information on Business Share Tolerances and Penalty Costs, please
view the animation in the lesson Carrier Selection, online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Tolerances and penalty costs can be defined for business shares. As long as business shares
are within the tolerance limits, the cost calculations during carrier ranking are not affected.
Tolerances are always defined in percentages (%). If the total business share of the carrier
exceeds the defined tolerances, either shortfall or over, a penalty applies.
The shortage penalty costs are added to all carriers, other than the one selected. The excess
penalty costs are added to the carrier under consideration. Penalties are maintained as
numeric values in the business share. This number is multiplied by the deviation percentage
to arrive at the penalty cost.
It only makes sense to use business shares if you have defined penalty costs. It is
recommended to also always define tolerances to give the optimizer a certain amount of
leeway.
Example Two
There is a penalty of 1000 defined in the business share. An excess tolerance of 10% is also
defined. During business share calculation, if the excess is 12%, the excess liable for penalty is
2%. This 2 is multiplied by 1000 to arrive at the total excess penalty costs of 2000.

Note:
When calculating the total costs for a carrier, if you are working with TCM costs,
there will be a currency assigned to the costs. To assign a currency to business
share penalty costs, go to Carrier Selection Settings → Advanced
Settings → Common Currency.
For example, if you are working with carriers from multiple geographic locations
with multiple currencies to arrive at the correct ranking, the system uses the
common currency (maintained in the Carrier Selection Settings) for all its
calculations. The currency displayed in the carrier ranking list is always the local
currency of the carrier (maintained in the freight agreement).
All FORs in the business share context are selected for the business share penalty
calculations, though these FORs are not selected during the planning run.
For example, assume in a business share context there are two carriers, A and B.
There are no tolerances defined. Carrier A is awarded a 60% business share and
Carrier B a 40% business share. There are already 10 freight orders awarded, of
which Carrier A is assigned six and Carrier B is assigned four.
Now let us perform carrier selection for the eleventh FOR. If Carrier B is assigned
this FOR, Carrier A will have a shortfall of business share, and the penalty cost for
the shortfall will be charged to Carrier B, on top of the usual costs determined
during carrier selection.
If Carrier A is assigned the eleventh FOR, Carrier B will have a shortfall of business
share, and the penalty cost will be charged to carrier A, on top of the usual costs
determined during carrier selection. Both options are evaluated by the system and
the ranking is done accordingly.
Carrier Selection Settings

The objective of carrier selection is to provide a ranking list of carriers that are available to
execute a planned freight order. You can perform carrier selection manually, by using an
optimization algorithm, or by using an auctioning mechanism as part of the tendering
process.
The primary objective of carrier selection is to assign a reliable and cost-efficient carrier to a
freight order. This can be done in the background, interactively using manual steps, or by
using an automated optimization procedure.
Carrier selection can be started directly from the freight order user interface (UI) or from any
work list that displays freight orders. It can also be started for freight orders inside the
Carrier selection can be executed as part of a planning strategy (for example, by including
method VSR_TSPS as in planning strategy VSR_1STEP, which is delivered as a standard
planning strategy that combines vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimization and
carrier selection.
In the background, the carrier selection process can be initiated in the following ways:
● As part of the transportation planning process with background report /SCMTMS/
PLN_OPT and using a planning strategy that includes carrier selection (for example,
VSR_1STEP)

● By scheduling report /SCMTMS/TSPS_OPT_BGD

● By assigning strategy Carr_Sel as a creation strategy in the freight order type Customizing
The carrier selection process is predominantly used in land transportation. However, the
carrier selection process can also be triggered for freight bookings using the background
report or from the freight booking UI. In contrast to carrier selection for freight orders, carrier
selection for freight bookings will only consider transportation allocations – no business
shares or continuous moves.
The input data for carrier selection is one or more freight orders (selected interactively in a
work-list) or a selection profile by which the freight orders that need to have a carrier assigned
are determined. In addition, carrier selection settings are required to specify exactly how
carrier selection should be carried out. These settings control the carrier selection process
and determine which constraints are used and how. Therefore, configuring carrier selection
settings for automatic carrier selection is mandatory.
Figure 170: Carrier Selection Settings
Animation: Carrier Selection Settings

For more information on Carrier Selection Settings, please view the animation in
the lesson Carrier Selection, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
The following fields are the most important to influence the carrier selection process:
● Check Incompatibilities: Incompatibilities are checked only if this checkbox has been
selected.
● Incompatibility Settings: If the Check Incompatibilities checkbox is selected,
incompatibility settings define which incompatibility definitions need to be adhered to.
● Type of Carrier Selection Settings: This parameter defines the purpose of carrier selection.
Available options are General Carrier Selection, Carrier Selection for Tendering, and
Carrier Selection for Direct Shipment.

● Allocation Usage: This parameter determines the consideration of transportation

allocations. Available options are to use transportation allocations, not to use them, or to
decide on the transportation lane level.
● BS Usage: This business share usage parameter determines the consideration of business
shares. Available options are to use business shares, not to use them, or to decide on the
transportation lane level.
● Strategy: The strategy determines how the objective of carrier selection is calculated in
optimization. The objective can be based on cost, priority, the sum of cost plus priority, or
the product of cost times priority. In addition, the Use Transportation Lane Settings option
can delegate this decision by geography to the individual transportation lanes, so that in
different geographical areas, different objectives can be pursued (for example, priority in
one transportation lane and costs in another transportation lane).
● Carrier Cost Origin: Carrier cost origin defines how costs are calculated. Transportation
charges from Transportation Charge Management or internal costs can be used. The No
Cost Determination strategy may be used if carrier selection for tendering searches for the
available carriers in a broadcast tendering process. Like the settings for strategy with the
Use Transportation Lane Settings, you can delegate this decision by geography to the
individual transportation lanes.
● Planning Strategy: The default planning strategy for carrier selection is TSPS_DEF.
● Optimizer Runtime: This parameter specifies the maximum runtime for the optimizer (in
seconds).
● Consider Manual Assignments as Fixed: Dealing with manual assignments in automatic
carrier selection is an important topic because there is likely a reason for manual
assignments, and they should not simply be overridden. Therefore, manual assignments
can be considered as fixed when this checkbox is selected.
● Action for Manual Rankings: A similar question is how to deal with manual rankings.
Available options for manual rankings are to keep them, remove them, or keep the carrier
only when it is considered available.
● Transportation Charge Interpretation: If, for any reason, the transportation charges for a
carrier for a freight order are evaluated as zero, this parameter determines how to deal
with it. Available options are to either ignore the carrier availability for this freight order or
accept the carrier for this freight order as either the cheapest available carrier or the most
expensive one.
● Action after Carrier Selection Run: Available actions after the carrier selection run are the
automatic assignment of the highest ranking carrier to the freight order or doing nothing
(that is, leaving this decision to a manual process/user, based on the created carrier
ranking).
● Consider Hierarchy: This parameter chooses the available carriers. Options include
considering only those carriers defined on the most specific transportation lane or
considering all transportation lanes to retrieve available carriers.
● Continuous Move Type: With this parameter, you decide whether only simple continuous
moves are allowed, only round-trips are allowed, continuous moves are not considered at
all, or this decision is made on the transportation lane level.


Unit 7
Exercise 17
Execute Carrier Selection
Simulation: Execute Carrier Selection

For more information on Execute Carrier Selection, please view the simulation in
the lesson Carrier Selection online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support automatic carrier selection. Sue,
the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to set up SAP TM such that carriers are selected
automatically for a certain transportation lane, based on priorities and considering business
shares.
Note:
1. Determine the trade lane between shipping point SP_1010 and transportation zone DE-
NRW for means of transport TM2-FTL.
2. Review business shares for carriers TM-CAR-10 and TM-CAR-11 valid this year for the
trade lane identified in the previous step.
3. What is the target business share for carrier TM-CAR-10? What is the positive and
negative tolerance defined for this business share?
4. What is the current load and current share for carrier TM-CAR-10 and TM-CAR-11? Note
down these figures.
5. Create carrier selection settings S4TM2-CARSEL-## and assign them to your planning
profile S4TM2-PLAN-##. Carrier selection shall consider business shares and be based on
priorities. The best carrier is to be assigned after the carrier selection run. For the other
values, maintain the values from the following table:

Field Value
Carrier Selection Settings S4TM2-CARSEL-##
Description Carrier Selection Settings User

##
Check Incompatibilities Selected

Type of Carrier Selection Settings General Carrier Selection
BS Usage Always Use Business Share
Strategy Priority
Planning Strategy TSPS_DEF
Optimizer Runtime 6
Action for Manual Ranking Keep
Common Currency EUR
Action After Carrier Selection Run Assign Best Carrier
Consider Hierarchy Consider all Locations, Transpor-

tation Zones, and MTr
Continuous Move Type Do Not Create Continuous Move
following data:
Field Value
7. If you have saved the planning result in a previous exercise, you need to remove it:
Remove the planning result for your freight units to customer TM2G##-03
8. Create a freight order from the shipping point SP_1010 to customer TM2G##-03 using
vehicle resource TM2FTL-## by assigning both freight units to this customer to the
vehicle resource. Save your planning result.
9. Which carrier is assigned to your freight order? What does the carrier ranking look like?
10. Execute carrier selection for your freight order and save the result. Make a note of your
freight order number.

trade lane identified in step 1 of this exercise.
down these figures and compare with the result of step 4 of this exercise.

Unit 7
Solution 17
Simulation: Execute Carrier Selection

For more information on Execute Carrier Selection, please view the simulation in
the lesson Carrier Selection online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support automatic carrier selection. Sue,
the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to set up SAP TM such that carriers are selected
automatically for a certain transportation lane, based on priorities and considering business
shares.
Note:
1. Determine the trade lane between shipping point SP_1010 and transportation zone DE-
NRW for means of transport TM2-FTL.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, in the search field, type Edit Trade Lane to open the
trade lane app.
b) In the Trade Lane field, use the value help (F4).
c) In the pop-up window, enter the following data:
● Source: SP_1010
● Destination: DE-NRW
● Means of Transport: TM2-FTL
d) Choose GO.
e) Select the trade lane.
f) Note down the trade lane ID and leave the transaction.
trade lane identified in the previous step.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Planning → Edit Business Share.

b) In the Business Share field, use the value help (F4) and select the business share valid
for this calendar year for the trade lane identified in the previous step.
3. What is the target business share for carrier TM-CAR-10? What is the positive and
negative tolerance defined for this business share?
The target business share for carrier TM-CAR-10 is 50%. The negative and positive
tolerances are both 20%.
down these figures.
The current load and current share for carrier TM-CAR-10 and TM-CAR-11 varies.
5. Create carrier selection settings S4TM2-CARSEL-## and assign them to your planning
profile S4TM2-PLAN-##. Carrier selection shall consider business shares and be based on
priorities. The best carrier is to be assigned after the carrier selection run. For the other
values, maintain the values from the following table:
Field Value
Carrier Selection Settings S4TM2-CARSEL-##
Description Carrier Selection Settings User

##
Check Incompatibilities Selected

Type of Carrier Selection Settings General Carrier Selection
BS Usage Always Use Business Share
Strategy Priority
Planning Strategy TSPS_DEF
Optimizer Runtime 6
Action for Manual Ranking Keep
Common Currency EUR
Action After Carrier Selection Run Assign Best Carrier
Consider Hierarchy Consider all Locations, Transpor-

tation Zones, and MTr
Continuous Move Type Do Not Create Continuous Move
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Carrier Selection
Settings.
d) Save your data.

g) In the Profile Assignments area of the Planning Profile, enter the Carrier Selection
SettingsS4TM2-CARSEL-##.
h) Save your data.
following data:
Field Value
c) Choose Continue.
7. If you have saved the planning result in a previous exercise, you need to remove it:
Remove the planning result for your freight units to customer TM2G##-03
a) In the Freight Unit Stages screen area, select the freight units to TM2G##-03.
c) Choose Save.
8. Create a freight order from the shipping point SP_1010 to customer TM2G##-03 using
vehicle resource TM2FTL-## by assigning both freight units to this customer to the
vehicle resource. Save your planning result.
a) Select both freight unit to customer TM2G##-03 in the Freight Unit Stages screen
area.
b) Select the vehicle resource TM2FTL-## in the Trucks screen area.
c) Choose Assign Selected Items.
d) Choose Save.
No carrier is assigned to your freight order and the carrier ranking is empty.
a) In the Road Freight Orders screen area, check the Carrier column for your freight
order. It will be empty.
b) In the Road Freight Orders screen area, click in Actions → Details for your freight order.

c) In the bottom screen area, open the Carrier Ranking tab. It will be empty.
a) In the Road Freight Orders, select your freight order.
b) Choose Carrier Selection → Automatic.
c) Choose Save.
Carrier TM-CAR-10 or TM-CAR-11 will be assigned to your freight order and the carrier
ranking will include these two carriers.
a) In the Road Freight Orders screen area, check the Carrier column for your freight
order.
b) In the Road Freight Orders screen area, click in Actions → Details for your freight order.
c) In the bottom screen area, open the Carrier Ranking tab.
trade lane identified in step 1 of this exercise.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Planning → Edit Business Share.
b) In the Business Share field, use the value help (F4) and select the business share valid
for this calendar year for the trade lane identified in the previous step.
down these figures and compare with the result of step 4 of this exercise.
The current load and current share for carrier TM-CAR-10 and TM-CAR-11 varies.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 7
Lesson 2
Load Planning
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Load Planning
During truck planning, rules are applied to fulfill legal restrictions. For example, certain axle
loads may not be exceeded. In addition, a certain loading sequence of the goods to be
transported optimizes the transportation plan. Load planning concerns the loading of goods
to be transported in an optimized manner into a transportation unit, be it be a truck, trailer, or
container resource.
You can plan the loading space of box trucks, trailers, semi-trailers, and containers in the
transportation cockpit or directly in one of the following business documents:
● Road freight order
● Trailer unit
● Container unit
Planning is carried out at the level of business document items. Load planning returns an
approximate calculation of how the available loading space can be optimally used, taking into
account the maximum axle loads and the maximum weight of a vehicle resource. The
calculation is based on the master data that you enter for the resource.
In automatic load planning, also known as load optimization, the load optimizer creates a load
plan for your business document. It considers capacity restrictions in terms of the height,
width, weight, and length of the loading space. For vehicle resources with two axle groups, it
also considers the maximum axle load.
Vehicle Capacity Attributes
● VSR:
- One-dimensional, for example, volume or mass: Up to eight dimensions.
● VSO:
- Three-dimensional, for example, pallet or box size: Visual representation.
● Vehicle capacity is maintained in vehicle resource master data.
In vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) planning, SAP TM considers the resource capacities
of weight and volume. However, the new load planning function requires much more
information on master data level. Not only are weight and volume limitations considered more
precisely, but weight distribution of axles is also planned. This is required to fulfill legal
restrictions when creating a load plan.

Within the resource master data, on the Physical Properties tab, there are additional capacity
and resource configuration fields to maintain. You can specify attributes regarding dimension,
weight, and type of resource. One specific attribute is the definition of axle groups.
Figure 173: Vehicle Types Example 1: Box Truck
The table, Box Truck, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle
Types Example 1: Box Truck.
Table 20: Box Truck

Measurement in Figure Name in the Master Data Description
a1 Axle Group Distance 1 Distance between axle group

1 and the front of the box
truck
c Cargo body distance Distance between the start of
the loading space and the
front of the box truck
2 and the front of the box
truck
d Connector Distance Distance between the trailer
coupling of the box truck and
the front of the vehicle
s2 Distance Between Axles Distance within axle group 2
h Interior Height Height of the loading space

Lesson: Load Planning
l Interior Length Length of the loading space
Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
Figure 174: Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
The table, Semi-Trailer, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle
Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer.
Table 21: Semi-Trailer


1 and the front of the trailer
s1 Distance Between Axles Distance within axle group 1
k King Pin Distance Distance between the king
pin and the front of the trailer
h Interior Height Height of the loading space
l Interior Length Length of the loading space
p Split Deck Position Position in the trailer at which
you have added the split deck
Freight Unit Dimensions

Dimensions of individual packages are determined from the business document items; that is,
freight unit items are the basis for load planning and load optimization in the transportation
cockpit. The following are relevant dimensions:

● Length
● Height
● Width
● Gross Weight
Load Plan Settings

Load planning settings define a process controller strategy. This strategy defines a sequence
of methods to be executed for the load planning and enables a flexible combination of
standard and custom logic. With the strategy, it is possible to define a set of rules to be
applied when optimizing the load. The rules can be given a priority, deactivated to test the
planning with a different rule set, and adjusted with certain attributes.
Figure 175: Load Planning Settings
Animation: Load Planning Settings

For more information on Load Planning Settings, please view the animation in the
lesson Load Planning, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Load Planning Settings Definition
● Load planning strategy

● Load optimization runtime
● Load planning rules (including their priorities and parameters)
Load planning settings are assigned in the planning profile. By assigning a planning profile in
the freight order type, different load planning settings can be used for different freight order
types.

Load Planning Rules

In automatic load planning, you can define rules to be considered by the system during a load
optimization run. You can choose between the following types of rules:
● Rules that apply to automatic planning for all resource types
● Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of box trucks
● Rules that apply only to the automatic planning of trailers and semi-trailers
● Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of the upper decks of double-deck
trailers
You can define different rules for the lower and upper deck of double-deck trailers.
The combination of stack, row, and line indicates the exact position of each package loaded
onto the resource. Packages loaded on top of each other form a stack. Packages loaded next
to each other from left to right form a row. The first row of a deck is always placed towards the
start of the loading space. Packages loaded one behind the other from front to back form a
line. The first line of a deck is always on the left side of the deck in the direction of travel.
Rules for Load Planning
● Stack height ascending in driving direction

● Stack height descending in driving direction
● Maximum height difference of adjacent stacks
● Maximum height difference of stacks within a row
● Maximum height difference of stacks within a line
● Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight
● Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight multiplied by volume
● Packages with high density must be at the bottom of the stack
● Packages can be positioned anywhere in the stack regardless of weight and density
Figure 177: New Load Plan Rule

Load Planning
The load plan is the result of load planning. It provides you with an overview of how the loading
space available for transporting a business document is used currently.
In both the transportation cockpit and in the business document, you can display the
complete load plan as a 3D load plan or a table load plan of business document items. In the
3D load plan, you can show or hide individual objects as well as entire rows, columns, or
stacks and fill them with different colors. Furthermore, you can show and hide gridlines in
your decks in the 3D load plan.
If items cannot be loaded, the load plan includes information on the loading sequence and the
exact position on the vehicle. In addition to the load plan, a load distribution is available for
each axle and the complete vehicle. This document proves that the load plan fulfills legal
requirements. An additional tab holds statistical indicators such as the used volume and area.
The Load Plan
The load plan contains the following information about the business document item:
● Resource
● Item in the resource
● Loading sequence
● Row, stack, and level in the loading space
● Gross weight
● Height, width, and length
● Stackability
Load Plan Analysis

The following is the load distribution and statistical data based on the current load plan:
● Number of loaded business document items

● Used area on the lower deck of your double-deck trailer
● Utilization of the loading volume in percent
● Used area on the upper deck of your double-deck trailer
● Maximum weight for each axle group compared to the current weight for each axle group
● Maximum trailing load compared to the current trailing load

Unit 7
Exercise 18
Configure and Execute Load Planning
Simulation: Configure and Execute Load Planning

For more information on Configure and Execute Load Planning, please view the
simulation in the lesson Load Planning online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
As a transportation planner, you need to generate load plans that adhere to defined load
planning rules. You are tasked to demonstrate that process and create corresponding master
data.
Note:
1. What is the maximum allowed axle weight on the first axle group of vehicle resource TM2-
LOADPLAN?
2. What is the axle type and empty weight of the second axle group of vehicle resource TM2-
LOADPLAN?
3. What is the maximum length, width, and height of the loading space of vehicle resource
TM2-LOADPLAN?
4. In the Resource Viewer, check the 3D model of resource TM2-LOADPLAN.
5. Create load planning settings S4TM2-LOAD-##. Assign the load planning rule 1000 (stack
height ascending in driving direction) with priority 1 (high), load planning rule 2165
(maximize floor space usage) with priority 2 and load planning rule 4000 (US Federal

Bridge Formula). Assign the load planning settings to your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-
##. Use the data in the following table:
Table 22: Load Planning Settings

Field Value
Load Planning Settings S4TM2-LOAD-##
Description Load Planning Settings for Group

##
Load Planning Strategy ALP_DEF
Runtime 10
6. In the transportation cockpit, create a freight order from shipping point SP_1010 to
customer TM2G##-01 with resource TM2-LOADPLAN for the freight unit that you have
created in the exercise "Configure Package Building and Create Packages based on Sales
Orders" (you can identify this freight unit by its customer PO number PB-## in the query).
Enter the transportation cockpit via the Selection Criteria start screen. Select resource
TM2-LOADPLAN, planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##, and transportation cockpit layout
LAYOUT-LOAD. Manually drag and drop the freight unit to resource TM2-LOADPLAN.
7. Execute load planning for the newly created freight order.
8. Review the load plan. What is the load planning status at the source location SP3100?
9. Review the load distribution. What is the total utilization? What is the utilization on the first
axle group?
10. How many items are loaded?
11. What is the floor size of the cargo body? How much floor space is used?
12. What is the volume of the truck and how much of the volume has been used?

Unit 7
Solution 18
Simulation: Configure and Execute Load Planning

For more information on Configure and Execute Load Planning, please view the
simulation in the lesson Load Planning online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
As a transportation planner, you need to generate load plans that adhere to defined load
planning rules. You are tasked to demonstrate that process and create corresponding master
data.
Note:
1. What is the maximum allowed axle weight on the first axle group of vehicle resource TM2-
LOADPLAN?
The maximum weight on the first axle group is 16000 kg.
b) In the Resource field, enter TM2-LOADPLAN and choose Display Resources.
c) Navigate to the Load Optimization tab.
2. What is the axle type and empty weight of the second axle group of vehicle resource TM2-
LOADPLAN?
The axle type of the second axle group is single axle. Its empty weight is 6000 kg.
c) Navigate to the Load Optimization tab.

3. What is the maximum length, width, and height of the loading space of vehicle resource
TM2-LOADPLAN?
The internal length is 6m, the internal width is 2,40m, and the internal height is 2,50m.
c) Navigate to the Capacities tab.
4. In the Resource Viewer, check the 3D model of resource TM2-LOADPLAN.

a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to TM Master Data → Resource Viewer.
b) In the Search Resources screen area, search for resource TM2-LOADPLAN by entering
TM2-LOADPLAN in the Resource field and choosing Go.
c) In the Resources screen area, select resource TM2-LOADPLAN.
d) Close all screen areas except for the 3D Model screen area.
e) Examine the 3D model of resource TM2-LOADPLAN.
f) Close the app.
5. Create load planning settings S4TM2-LOAD-##. Assign the load planning rule 1000 (stack
height ascending in driving direction) with priority 1 (high), load planning rule 2165
(maximize floor space usage) with priority 2 and load planning rule 4000 (US Federal
Bridge Formula). Assign the load planning settings to your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-
##. Use the data in the following table:
Table 22: Load Planning Settings

Field Value
Load Planning Settings S4TM2-LOAD-##
Description Load Planning Settings for Group

##
Load Planning Strategy ALP_DEF
Runtime 10
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Create Load Planning
Settings.
b) Enter the data in the Load Planning Settings table.
c) In the Load Planning Rules screen area, choose Insert.
d) In the Load Planning Rule field, enter 1000.
e) In the Load Planning Rules screen area, choose Insert.
f) In the Load Planning Rule field, enter 2165. In the Priority column, choose 2.

g) In the Load Planning Rules screen area, choose Insert.
h) In the Load Planning Rule field, enter 4000.
i) Save your data.
j) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Planning Profile.
k) Enter the name of your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-## and choose Continue.
l) In the Profile Assignments area of the Planning Profile, enter the Load Planning
SettingsS4TM2-LOAD-##.
m) Save your data.
6. In the transportation cockpit, create a freight order from shipping point SP_1010 to
customer TM2G##-01 with resource TM2-LOADPLAN for the freight unit that you have
created in the exercise "Configure Package Building and Create Packages based on Sales
Orders" (you can identify this freight unit by its customer PO number PB-## in the query).
Enter the transportation cockpit via the Selection Criteria start screen. Select resource
TM2-LOADPLAN, planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-##, and transportation cockpit layout
LAYOUT-LOAD. Manually drag and drop the freight unit to resource TM2-LOADPLAN.
b) Select the query Freight Units → All Order-Based Freight Units.
c) Click on the column header for Customer PO Number and select (User Defined Filter).
d) In the pop-up window, enter your PO number PB-## and choose OK.
f) Select the row with your freight unit/sales order and choose the Transportation
Cockpit button.
g) In the Switch Start Screen dropdown menu, select Selection Criteria.
h) In the screen area for Resources, enter Vehicles is TM2-LOADPLAN.
i) In the screen area for Settings, enter Planning Profile is S4TM2-PLAN-##.
j) In the screen area for Settings, enter Page Layout for Transportation Cockpit is
LAYOUT-LOAD.
k) Choose Continue.
l) Select the freight unit in the Freight Unit Stages screen area and drag and drop it to the
row with vehicle resource TM2-LOADPLAN in the Trucks screen area.
m) Choose Save to save your freight order.
7. Execute load planning for the newly created freight order.

a) Select the freight order in the Road Freight Orders screen area.
b) In the Road Freight Orders screen area, choose Create Load Plan.
c) Save your data.

8. Review the load plan. What is the load planning status at the source location SP3100?
The load planning status is Invalidated, because the load plan has just been changed.
a) Select the freight order in the Road Freight Orders screen area and choose
b) In the Overview tab, in the Load Plan Status column, the load planning status is
displayed.
9. Review the load distribution. What is the total utilization? What is the utilization on the first
axle group?
The total utilization is 43%. The utilization on the first axle group is 45%.
b) Navigate to the Load Plan tab.
c) Navigate to the Load Distribution tab.
10. How many items are loaded?
4 of 4 items are loaded.
c) Navigate to the Statistics tab.
11. What is the floor size of the cargo body? How much floor space is used?
The floor size of the cargo body is 14,4m² and the used floor of the cargo body is 3,84m²
(26,7%).
12. What is the volume of the truck and how much of the volume has been used?
The volume of the truck is 36m³ and 1,44m³ has been used.


LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 7
Lesson 3
Short-Cut Process
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Short-Cut Process
Creating a freight order directly from the FUBR is called the short-cut planning process
because, in this case, freight units as separate business documents are omitted, and
additional planning steps are not required because the freight order is created right away.
The purpose of the short-cut process is to skip any planning activities, because these may not
be required in certain scenarios. For example, if the sales orders that are received by a
company already state the required truck size, the freight order could be created directly
from the transportation demand (in this example, a sale order). Technically, this is done
during freight unit building by selecting a freight order type instead of a freight unit type.
Thus, freight units are omitted in the scenarios where transportation demand/requirement
exactly matches the to-be-created transportation document.
Animation: Standard and Short-Cut Processes

For more information on Standard and Short-Cut Processes, please view the
animation in the lesson Short-Cut Process, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Figure 180: Standard and Short-Cut Processes


Unit 7
Exercise 19
Configure and Execute the Short-Cut Process
Simulation: Configure and Execute the Short-Cut Process

For more information on Configure and Execute the Short-Cut Process, please
view the simulation in the lesson Short-Cut Process online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to use the short-cut process for orders with a gross weight between
15to and 20to. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to configure this process.
Note:
1. Create a freight order type F6##. Carrier Selection shall be executed when freight orders
of this type are created and the carrier selection settings S4TM2-CARSEL-## shall be
used for this purpose. The default means of transport should be TM2-FTL. In addition, use
the following data.
Field Value
Freight Order Description Freight Order F6## (Short-cut)
Number Range Interval FO
Default Means of Transport for DocType TM2-FTL
Shipper/Ship-to Party Determination Determination based on Predeces-

sor Documents


Field Value

Creation Strategy CARR_SEL
Default Carrier Selection Settings S4TM2-CARSEL-##
2. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-SC-##. The freight unit building rule should use
process controller strategy FUB_AUTO and create freight orders of type F6##. Item splits
should be allowed and default routes should not be applied. In addition, use the following
data:

Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-SC-##
Description FUBR User ## for short-cut proc-

ess
Document Type F6##

Parts)

Field Value

Lesson: Short-Cut Process

Building
Gross Volume M3 80
3. Check how this freight unit building rule is selected in condition FUBR_S4TM2.
Note:
Do NOT make any changes to condition FUBR_S4TM2.
4. In which case does freight unit building rule FUBR-SC-## get selected?
● Division: 00
You want to sell 25 PCs of material TM-MAT-01 and the customer reference is TM-##.
6. Check whether a freight order has been created for your sales order by filtering the All
Order-Based Freight Orders query for your document type F6##.
7. Check the document flow of your freight order.
8. In the Document Flow tab, what is the predecessor business document for this freight
order?
9. Can you explain why a sales order is the predecessor document?

10. Which means of transport is used in this freight order? Do you know why?
11. Has a carrier ranking been created and a carrier selected?
12. Can you explain why a carrier ranking is created?

Unit 7
Solution 19
Simulation: Configure and Execute the Short-Cut Process

For more information on Configure and Execute the Short-Cut Process, please
view the simulation in the lesson Short-Cut Process online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to use the short-cut process for orders with a gross weight between
15to and 20to. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to configure this process.
Note:
1. Create a freight order type F6##. Carrier Selection shall be executed when freight orders
of this type are created and the carrier selection settings S4TM2-CARSEL-## shall be
used for this purpose. The default means of transport should be TM2-FTL. In addition, use
the following data.
Field Value
Freight Order Description Freight Order F6## (Short-cut)
Number Range Interval FO
Default Means of Transport for DocType TM2-FTL
Shipper/Ship-to Party Determination Determination based on Predeces-

sor Documents


Field Value

Creation Strategy CARR_SEL
Default Carrier Selection Settings S4TM2-CARSEL-##
b) In Customizing, choose Transportation Management → Freight Order

Management → Freight Order → Define Freight Order Type.
d) Enter the data provided in the table.
e) Save and exit the function.
2. Create a freight unit building rule FUBR-SC-##. The freight unit building rule should use
process controller strategy FUB_AUTO and create freight orders of type F6##. Item splits
should be allowed and default routes should not be applied. In addition, use the following
data:

Field Value
Freight Unit Building Rule FUBR-SC-##
Description FUBR User ## for short-cut proc-

ess
Document Type F6##

Parts)


Field Value

Building
Gross Volume M3 80
Rule.
3. Check how this freight unit building rule is selected in condition FUBR_S4TM2.
Note:
Do NOT make any changes to condition FUBR_S4TM2.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Profiles and Settings → Edit Condition.
b) In the Condition field, enter FUBR_S4TM2 and choose Continue.
4. In which case does freight unit building rule FUBR-SC-## get selected?
FUBR-SC-## gets selected for Buyer Origin Document values TM-## and gross weights in
the range of 15000 kg to 20000 kg.
a) In the decision table, identify the row with the value FUBR-SC-## in column FUB Rule
(green column).

● Division: 00
● Division: 00
c) Choose Continue.
e) Choose Save.
6. Check whether a freight order has been created for your sales order by filtering the All
Order-Based Freight Orders query for your document type F6##.
b) Select the query Freight Orders → All Order-Based Freight Orders.
c) Click on the column header for Document Type and select (User Defined Filter).
d) In the pop-up window, enter your document type F6## and choose OK.
7. Check the document flow of your freight order.

a) Select your freight order with document type F6## by clicking the Document number.
b) Navigate to the Document Flow tab.
8. In the Document Flow tab, what is the predecessor business document for this freight
order?
The predecessor document of this freight order is the sales order created in step 5.

9. Can you explain why a sales order is the predecessor document?
Yes. For the items of the sales order freight unit building rule FUBR-SC-## was selected,
which has created this freight order in the short-cut process.
10. Which means of transport is used in this freight order? Do you know why?
Means of transport TM2-FTL is used in this freight order. You have defined this in step 1 of
this exercise in the freight order type.
a) Navigate to the General Data tab.
11. Has a carrier ranking been created and a carrier selected?
A carrier ranking has been created, which includes at least carriers TM-CAR-10 and TM-
CAR-11. A carrier has been selected.
a) Navigate to the Subcontracting tab.
b) On the Subcontracting tab, select the Carrier Ranking tab.
12. Can you explain why a carrier ranking is created?
Yes. In the freight order type customizing, creation strategy CARR_SEL is defined, which
initiates carrier selection on creation of the freight order. Carrier selection settings
S4TM2-CARSEL-## is used in this process which is defined as a default carrier selection
setting in the customizing of freight order type F6##.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 7
Learning Assessment
1. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of
the following statements is true?
X A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM for ensuring all carriers in a

region have sufficient business.
X B Business share buckets provide a means of numerous shippers pooling together to

create merged (shared) freight orders.
X C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to

various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these
into account during optimization.
X D A company may have working formalised relationships with a number of carriers.

Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amount of
business from the company.
2. Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be
maintained in the carrier selection settings.
X True
X False
3. Load optimization can consider only one planning rule.

X True
X False


X A A freight order is created from sales order directly.
X B Planning activities are omitted during short-cut planning.
X C Short-cut planning is not possible in SAP S/4HANA.

UNIT 8 Transportation Execution
Lesson 1
Transportation Units and Service Orders 325
Lesson 2
Warehouse Integration 330
Exercise 20: Pick Delivery and Post Goods Issue 335
Lesson 3
Advance Shipping and Receiving 341
Lesson 4
Output Management 346
Exercise 21: Create Configuration of Output Management and Print Outputs 349
Lesson 5
Track & Trace 359
Lesson 6
Discrepancy Management 366
Exercise 22: Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a Discrepancy 371
UNIT OBJECTIVES
● Understand transportation units

● Understand service orders
● Understand warehouse integration
● Understand Advance Shipping and Receiving
● Explore the configuration of output management
● Monitoring Events
● Configure discrepancy management

Unit 8: Transportation Execution

Unit 8
Lesson 1
Transportation Units and Service Orders
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Transportation Unit
TUs can represent both demand and capacity. They share some similarities with freight units
and others with freight orders, but they also differ from both freight units and freight orders.
Scenarios involving trailers, railcars, containers, and packages can be modeled by TUs,
abstracting from the specific documents called trailer units, railcar units, container units, and
package units. For these scenarios you have to configure freight order types and
transportation unit types.
Figure 182: Transportation Unit
Like freight documents, TUs have stages defining their paths through the network. While
trailer, railcar, and container resources can be assigned to the corresponding TUs, package
units represent one or multiple packages, each having an assigned packaging material. On the
one hand, TUs cannot move themselves; instead, they require being moved by a truck,
locomotive, vessel, or airplane and thus need to be assigned to a freight document. Therefore,
they represent a demand for transportation, like freight units.

The assignment of a TU to a freight document can be done directly – for example, trailer unit
to road freight order – or indirectly, such as container unit to trailer unit, which is then
assigned to a road freight order.
While a freight document cannot be assigned to another freight document, TUs allow nested
assignments within this document category. For example, consider the following assignment
chain: freight unit → package unit → container unit → trailer unit → road freight order. In this
case, the TUs represent three consolidation levels between freight unit and road freight order.
It is not possible to consolidate a trailer unit into another trailer unit, and this holds true
analogously for railcar units, container units, and package units.
On the other hand, TUs can consolidate other demands. Therefore, they also represent a
capacity for transportation, like freight documents. While a freight unit represents a single
transportation demand, the TU can represent a set of transportation demands that may even
have different source and destination locations. For example, a trailer is moved from location
A to B to C, delivering three freight units: the first from A to B, the second from A to C, and the
third from B to C. In general, TUs provide a lot of modeling capabilities but that requires
additional planning decisions and adds planning complexity. Therefore, we recommend
avoiding using TUs if your business can be modeled without them. Of course, for many
transportation scenarios, using TUs is mandatory because it is the only feasible way to model
your business.
Ways to Create TUs

There are many ways to create TUs:
● Manual planning can be done in the transportation cockpit, as described in Section.
● The VSR optimizer can create trailer units and railcar units based on freight units,
container units, and package units.
● Load consolidation can create trailer units and container units based on freight units and
package units.
● Package units of linear distribution type can be extracted out of road freight orders.
● FUB can create trailer units, railcar units, container units, and package units, but these TUs
represent pure demand documents and do not allow consolidation.
Configuring TUs
Each TU has a specific type, which you can maintain in Customizing by following the menu
path Transportation Management → Planning → Transportation Unit → Define Transportation
Unit.
Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the
transportation unit. For example, you use the transportation unit category to indicate whether
you want to create the transportation unit type for a trailer, a railcar, a container, or a
package. When you then create the related business document (for example, a trailer unit),
the system offers you only the relevant transportation units.

Lesson: Transportation Units and Service Orders
Document Structure with Transportation Units
Figure 183: Document Structure with Transportation Units
Table 26: Document Structure with Transportation Units: An Explanation
The following table provides explanatory information about the figure, Document Structure
with Transportation Units.
Transportation Order Structure
Trailer TU 1 ● Contains FU 1 and FU 2

● Defines own stages
Mover FO 1 ● Covers 1 TU stage
Mover FO 2 ● Covers 2 TU stages
For truck and tailer scenarios you have to configure freight order types and transportation
unit types.
Service Order
Cleaning containers, fumigating, and performing security services or documentation are
typical examples of services that can occur for items of a freight order or freight booking. The
service order is used to account for and track services, calculate charges,and enable
settlement of the charges for services that have been provided for individual items in a freight
order/booking or for the entire freight order/booking.
You can create service orders in the following two ways:
● Create service orders from freight bookings, freight orders, freight booking items, or
freight order items. With such a service order, you can:

- Enter service items related to the freight booking, freight order, freight booking item, or
freight order item.
- Add service items that are not related to the freight booking, freight order, freight
booking item, or freight order item. You can do this using the Add Service action without
marking another item.
● Create stand-alone service orders without reference to any freight booking, freight order,
freight booking item, or freight order item. You can use the Create Service Order function
to create a service order by entering the service order type.
Structure of Service Order

A service order contains the following information:
● General data including the service provider, service order type, and status of the service
order
● An item overview that contains the following information:
- Link to the freight booking or freight order for which the service order was created.
(Applies only for service orders created from freight bookings, freight orders, freight
booking items, or freight order items).
- IDs of the original freight booking items or freight order items for which services are to
be carried out, for example, containers or products. (Applies only for service orders
created from freight bookings, freight orders, freight booking items, or freight order
items).
- Services to be carried out.
- Location at which the services are to be executed and time period in which they are to
be executed.
● Transportation charges
● Document dependencies as well as predecessor and successor documents (document
flow)
● Other information such as the following:
- Notes
- Attachments
- Change documents
- Administrative data
- Output management information
Customizing Service Order

You make the required settings for service orders in Customizing for Transportation
Management under:
● Freight Order Management → Define Item Types for Freight Order Management
● Freight Order Management → Service Order → Define Service Order Types
● Basic Functions → General Settings → Define Service Types.
You can use the change controller to define how the system reacts to changes.

Lesson: Transportation Units and Service Orders
Service Order Types, Service Item Types, and Service Types:

In Customizing, when defining service order types, you can specify the allowed service item
types (these must be item types of the category Service). You make the required settings for
service order types in Customizing for Transportation Management under Freight Order
Management → Service Order → Define Service Order Types.
For each service item type, you can specify the allowed service types. For more information,
see Customizing for Transportation Management under Freight Order Management → Define
Item Types for Freight Order Management.
Then, you can use the service order type you defined to create a service order. You can
specify one of the allowed item types for the order and the system proposes the default
service type for that item type. You can specify a different service type. If you change this
service type to a type that you have not specified in Customizing as allowed for this item type,
the system returns a warning message.
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Lesson 2
Warehouse Integration
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Direct SAP TM and SAP EWM Integration

Since the days of SAP TM 9.0, the integration of SAP TM with SAP EWM ran via SAP ERP
using SAP ERP shipments as an intermediate step. Data was not sent directly between SAP
TM and SAP EWM. Since release 9.1, SAP TM supports direct integration between SAP TM
and SAP EWM without creating shipments in SAP ERP.
The next step in the evolution is the current scenario, where both SAP EWM and SAP TM run
as part of the SAP S/4HANA system since release 1709. The SAP EWM for SAP S/4HANA
design was adapted to reflect the principle of one design idea, which was the basic guideline
for the development of the new system. For SAP EWM for SAP S/4HANA, this meant both
direct access to master data without the need for replication and also structural changes in its
architecture.
As part of its first release in SAP S/4HANA 1610, the inbound delivery notification and the
ODR were removed. The purpose of these objects was to reflect the information of the
delivery and form the basis for further warehouse execution. With the introduction of SAP
EWM for SAP S/4HANA, this intermediate step was no longer necessary to be part of the
overall design and thus was removed.
In this unit, we explain the current, direct integration in SAP S/4HANA within an SAP EWM for
SAP S/4HANA. The integration scenarios are still based on orders and deliveries.
Standard Integration Scenarios

To optimize transportation costs and efforts in a flexible and optimized way, SAP TM supports
transportation planning based on either SO requirements or outbound deliveries. As part of
transportation planning, the results influence warehouse-internal processes such as staging.
The integration of the SAP TM transportation planning results into SAP EWM warehouse
management processes is beneficial because it enables smooth outbound processing with an
optimized warehouse-internal process according to the transportation planning result.
● Order-based integration
● Delivery-based integration
Integration type Outbound Inbound

Order based Sales orders Purchase Orders

Lesson: Warehouse Integration
Integration type Outbound Inbound

Delivery based Outbound deliveries Inbound Deliveries
SAP Note 1984252 describes the known supported functional scope and limitations of the
direct integration.
Delivery-Based Transportation and Warehouse Integration

The delivery-based integration scenario is an integrated warehousing and transportation
process that sends ordered goods via an external carrier to external customers from a
warehouse managed with SAP EWM. Transportation is planned in SAP TM, while warehouse
activities are planned and executed in SAP EWM. This process is based on SAP S/4HANA
sales orders and transportation requirements are based on SAP S/4HANA outbound
deliveries.
Figure 184: Delivery-Based Integration
Animation: Delivery-Based Integration

For more information on Delivery-Based Integration, please view the animation in
the lesson Warehouse Integration, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Delivery processing in SAP S/4HANA involves grouping deliveries to pick, pack, and ship and
then performing all the functions associated with the delivery process. Based on split criteria
or combination indicators, you can group together entire orders or individual items or split
orders into partial deliveries. Outbound deliveries are created and scheduled in SAP S/
4HANA and are the basis for transportation planning in SAP TM.

Because of the transportation planning in SAP TM, a freight order is created in SAP TM,
which, as soon as the freight order is ready for loading, results in the creation of a
transportation unit in SAP EWM.
One or more delivery positions can create one or more freight units. At all times, the
documents created in SAP TM can be seen in the delivery via the document flow in the TM
Status tab of the delivery.
The deliveries are visible both in SAP TM for transportation planning and execution and in
SAP EWM for warehouse planning and execution. In SAP EWM, the delivery creates an
outbound delivery order, which acts as the actual warehouse request and initiates the GI
process in SAP EWM.
The outbound delivery contains data assumed from the preceding document and all
necessary information to trigger the GI process and monitor it accordingly. From the
perspective of warehouse management, the outbound delivery order represents a work list
that is completed only when the picked materials have been loaded and shipped.
The outbound delivery order in SAP EWM is still blocked for processing. It is released as soon
as the transportation planning process in SAP TM is completed, and SAP EWM is updated
with the final planning results. Sending the loading instructions to SAP EWM creates a TU and
automatically assigns the outbound delivery orders. With this assignment, the outbound
delivery orders are unlocked and updated with the related carrier information from SAP TM.
Unlocked outbound delivery order with transportation units are now the basis for warehouse
execution in SAP EWM. The SAP TM freight order now exists as a transportation unit in SAP
EWM. To easily identify the same object across all three systems, they all share the same
document number.
As soon as the materials have been picked, staged, and loaded,GI can be posted. During the
outbound process execution, SAP TM is updated with all execution-relevant information and
events.
Order-Based Transportation and Warehouse Integration

In addition to delivery-based integration, SAP EWM and SAP TM can also work together in an
order-based process. In contrast to the previous scenario, the outbound delivery is now
created because of freight unit–based delivery proposals and transportation planning in SAP
TM. In the delivery-based scenario, inventory planning and logistics execution had priority
over the transportation planning process in SAP TM, and deliveries were already created.
In the order-based scenario, SAP TM plans transportation based on SAP S/4HANA sales
orders and as a result proposes and creates deliveries based on the determined dates and
quantities. Transportation planning results in the creation of freight orders, which are the
basis for the delivery creation in SAP S/4HANA. In this context, SAP TM considers
transportation constraints, such as resource availability and transportation durations. The
created deliveries are usable by SAP EWM. In SAP TM, the freight order can be the basis for
tendering and carrier selection.

Figure 186: Order-Based Integration
Animation: Order-Based Integration

For more information on Order-Based Integration , please view the animation in
the lesson Warehouse Integration, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
The process starts with a sales order and a planned delivery date. This automatically creates
freight units. These are then the basis for transportation planning and optimization in SAP
TM.
The transportation planning in SAP TM is completed as soon as the transportation capacity of
the freight orders has been fully planned and all relevant transportation requirements have
been assigned. After the carrier has been assigned, SAP TM can trigger the creation of a SAP
S/4HANA outbound delivery and communicate the freight order number to the selected
carrier. These deliveries are based on the transportation planning results and therefore
consider planning constraints, such as resource availability, distances, durations, and
consolidation and dates. This step can be executed manually or automatically as a
background job. As soon as the delivery has been created, the document flow in SAP TM is
updated to show all related documents to a freight unit and freight order.
When the deliveries have been created, they are visible in the SAP EWM environment for
further processing as outbound delivery orders. The SAP S/4HANA delivery is created with
the proposed delivery date from SAP TM. If the SAP EWM outbound delivery orders haven’t
been assigned to a TU, these orders are locked for execution. When the transportation
planning activities are finished, and the freight order status has been set to Cargo Ready for
Loading, SAP TM sends a loading instruction to SAP EWM. This triggers the creation of a TU in
SAP EWM. In SAP EWM, the transportation units are automatically assigned to the (locked)
outbound delivery orders . With this assignment, the outbound delivery orders are unlocked
and updated with the related carrier information from SAP TM. Unlocked outbound delivery

orders, assigned to a Transportation units, are now the basis for warehouse execution in SAP
EWM.
Goods are picked, staged, and loaded on a truck. Posting GI in SAP EWM immediately adjusts
the inventory in SAP S/4HANA, updating the outbound deliveries and the freight order in SAP
TM for a later freight cost settlement.

Unit 8
Exercise 20
Pick Delivery and Post Goods Issue
Simulation: Pick Delivery and Post Goods Issue

For more information on Pick Delivery and Post Goods Issue, please view the
simulation in the lesson Warehouse Integration online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM. From the freight order, the goods issue
process shall be triggered. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to set up and
execute this process.
Note:
1. Trigger delivery creation for the freight order created in the exercise "Execute Carrier
Selection".
2. How many deliveries have been created? Note down the delivery number(s).
3. What is the execution status of the freight order? What is the logistical execution status?
4. Pick both items of the delivery from storage location 0001 at today's date with the Pick
Outbound Delivery app. Afterwards, post goods issue.
5. What is the logistical execution status of the freight order?

6. Change the Execution Status on the freight order to Set to Loaded. What is the execution
status of the freight order now? What is the logistical execution status?
7. What is the handling execution status for both freight order items?

Unit 8
Solution 20
Simulation: Pick Delivery and Post Goods Issue

For more information on Pick Delivery and Post Goods Issue, please view the
simulation in the lesson Warehouse Integration online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM. From the freight order, the goods issue
process shall be triggered. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how to set up and
execute this process.
Note:
1. Trigger delivery creation for the freight order created in the exercise "Execute Carrier
Selection".
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Order Management → Freight Order (Worklist).
b) Select the query Freight Orders → All Road Freight Orders.
e) If your freight orders do not show, choose Refresh.
f) Click on your freight order number (the one that has a carrier assigned in the Carrier
column).
g) In the freight order, select Follow Up → Create Deliveries.
2. How many deliveries have been created? Note down the delivery number(s).
One delivery has been created.
a) In the freight order, select the Document Flow tab. Check the delivery number in the
document flow.

3. What is the execution status of the freight order? What is the logistical execution status?
The execution status is Not Started. The logistical execution status is SP_1010 ( ) Not
Planned.
a) In the freight order, select the Statuses tab. Check the statuses.
4. Pick both items of the delivery from storage location 0001 at today's date with the Pick
Outbound Delivery app. Afterwards, post goods issue.
a) In the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to Shipping and Warehouse Management → Pick
Outbound Delivery.
b) In the Delivery field, enter the delivery number of the delivery created in step 1 of this
exercise and press the enter key.
c) In the Actual GI Date field, enter today's date.
d) For the first item, select > to get to the details screen.
e) In the Picking Quantity field, enter the same number as in the field Delivery Quantity (3
or 4) and in the Storage Location field, enter 0001.
f) Choose Apply.
g) For the second item, select > to get to the details screen.
h) In the Picking Quantity field, enter the same number as in the field Delivery Quantity (3
or 4) and in the Storage Location field, enter 0001.
i) Choose Apply.
j) Choose Save.
k) Choose Post GI.
5. What is the logistical execution status of the freight order?
The logistical execution status has changed to SP_1010 Not Loaded.
column).
g) In the freight order, select the Statuses tab. Check the statuses.

6. Change the Execution Status on the freight order to Set to Loaded. What is the execution
status of the freight order now? What is the logistical execution status?
The execution status has changed to Loading in Process. The logistical execution status
has changed to SP_1010 Loaded with timestamp.
a) In the freight order select ... → Execution Status → Set to Loaded.
b) Choose Save.
c) Navigate to the Statuses tab. Check the statuses.
7. What is the handling execution status for both freight order items?
The handling execution status for both items is Loaded.
b) In the Change hierarchy dropdown menu, select Status Management. Check the
statuses.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Lesson 3
Advance Shipping and Receiving
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Advance Shipping and Receiving

Advanced Shipping and Receiving is an integrated, end-to-end process that allows users to
send, receive, and transport products. It supports mixed and multi-warehouse scenarios
within one freight order. It helps you, to coordinate the process steps from arrival of trucks at
the gate to the final goods receipt in the warehouse. A truck that has posted arrival at a
checkpoint can carry out both loading and unloading activities at a location, or it can deliver
goods at several warehouses at the same location.
Advanced Shipping and Receiving simplifies communication between the Transportation
Management (TM), Extended Warehouse Management (EWM), Stock Room Management
(STRM), Inventory Management and Physical Inventory (MM-IM), and Logistics Execution
(LE) application components embedded in SAP S/4HANA. You need Materials Management
(MM) and Sales and Distribution (SD) to create transportation requirements.
The Advanced Shipping and Receiving process is based on the freight order and does not use
the EWM transportation unit (TU) or the EWM vehicle. Both integration processes, integration
based on the freight order or integration based on the EWM transportation unit, can run in
parallel. For warehouse-driven outbound processes, you start in EWM.

Figure 189: Advance Shipping and Receiving
Animation: Advance Shipping and Receiving

For more information on Advance Shipping and Receiving, please view the
animation in the lesson Advance Shipping and Receiving , online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
https://youtu.be/jLZM5S84AWM
Storage Location
The freight order can contain both EWM managed and IM managed storage locations, for
example at a production location, and the two storage locations can share a loading point.
In Advanced Shipping and Receiving you can integrate TM in S/4HANA with the following
warehouse management applications located in the same SAP S/4HANA system:
● Lean Warehouse Management in SAP S/4HANA:
You can use a very simple warehouse where inventory management takes place solely at
storage location level. You need to create a place holder warehouse that ensures the
document flow in TM.
● Stock Room Management in SAP S/4HANA:
You can use Stock Room Management for small warehouse operations and for warehouse
operations with low complexity. Stock Room Management contains SAP S/4HANA
functionality from the former Warehouse Management in Logistics Execution (LE-WM).
● Extended Warehouse Management in SAP S/4HANA:

Lesson: Advance Shipping and Receiving
You can use EWM for a flexible, automated support for processing various goods
movements and for managing stocks in your warehouse complex.
Prerequisites for Advanced Shipping and Receiving

Master Data:
You have made the following settings in the location master data on the SAP Easy Access
screen under Logistics Transportation Management Master Data Transportation Network
Location:
● You have activated Advanced Shipping and Receiving.
You do this, by indicating in the master data for your source or destination location.
Location type 1003, shipping point & location type 1200, loading points, is relevant for
Advanced Shipping and Receiving. This setting is mandatory.
● You have defined a location with location type 1200 (loading point). The setting is
mandatory.
Assignment of Doors:
Assign Stock Room Management (STRM) doors or Lean Warehouse Management (Lean WM)
doors to Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) doors or loading points. This setting is
mandatory for all scenarios using shared doors and multiple warehousing components. The
setting is not required for a scenario that only uses EWM.
Consignment order
A consignment order serves as an important basis for the communication between the
partners that are involved in a business process. For example, as a supplier you can
communicate to your ordering party which products you will deliver to a certain destination
on a specific delivery date. The consignment order receives an ID that serves as a reference
for the business partners. Consignment order can be assigned to one freight order.
Based on a consignment order, you can also perform subcontracting, charge calculation,
settlement with the carrier, and shipment tracking. It is not, however, possible to perform
tendering based on a consignment order.
You can then assign the consignment order to a road freight order and in doing so stipulate on
which truck the products contained in the consignment order are to be transported. A
consignment order can be assigned to only one freight order at a time and must be
completely assigned. A freight order can, however, contain several consignment orders. The
transportation is then planned and executed based on the freight order.

Figure 191: Consignment Order
End to End Process Flow
Animation: ASR End to End Process Flow

For more information on ASR End to End Process Flow, please view the
animation in the lesson Advance Shipping and Receiving , online in the SAP
Learning Hub.
The following processes are available:

● Inbound delivery process starting in TM/LE
● Outbound delivery process starting in LE or SD

Lesson: Advance Shipping and Receiving
Figure 193: ASR End to End Process Flow
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Lesson 4
Output Management
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Output Management
Figure 194: Output Management
Animation: Output Management

For more information on Output Management, please view the animation in the
lesson Output Management, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
You can use output management to print, fax, and email documents such as order, delivery,
and billing information. You can also execute application-to-application or business-to-
business actions. The Post Processing Framework (PPF) is a tool in SAP TM used to execute
program logic that is considered a follow-up action to a certain business process step. The
PPF is used for the following tasks or actions (to name a few):
● Document printing

Lesson: Output Management
● Ending messages, such as email, fax, or electronic data interchange (EDI)

● Work-flow triggers
All actions are defined in the PPF with a schedule condition that defines whether the action
needs to be executed and a processing time that defines when to execute the action.
An action profile bundles all actions concerning a specific business process area (for example,
the action profile /SCMTMS/TOR bundles all actions important for the freight order). You can
see in the Action Settings area where we can define the processing time of the action and
whether the action should be scheduled automatically or by a batch job.
The processing type of the action can be one of the following:
● Trigger alert
● Method call
● Work-flow
● Smart Forms actions
● External communication
To trigger PPF actions, start and schedule conditions need to be configured according to
business needs or rules, as follows:
● Schedule condition:
The schedule condition decides whether an action should be scheduled for processing. An
action is therefore only generated if the schedule condition is met.
The filter value is specified in the Schedule condition field. The standard value /BOFU/
EVAL_SCHEDULE_CONDITION ensures that the method in the agent class is invoked.
● Start condition:
The start condition is checked before the action is executed. The action is only executed
when the start condition has been fulfilled.
The filter value is specified in the Start condition field. The standard value /BOFU/
EVAL_START_CONDITION ensures that the method in the agent class is invoked.
Adapter Settings
Output management automates the output of business documents such as printouts, in
response to certain business events. This output management adapter helps you to integrate
output management functionality with application business objects (BOs) that are
implemented in a business object processing framework (BOPF).

Figure 196: Output Management Logic

Unit 8
Exercise 21
Create Configuration of Output Management
and Print Outputs
Create Configuration of Output Management and Print Outputs
Simulation: Create Configuration of Output Management and Print Outputs

For more information on Create Configuration of Output Management and Print
Outputs, please view the simulation in the lesson Output Management online in
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain how
to set up output management and how to create outputs.
Note:
1. Create a road waybill document (CMR) for the freight order created in the exercise
"Execute Carrier Selection". To do so, open the freight order and change its execution
status to Ready for Transportation Execution. Review the waybill document.
2. In Transportation Management, what framework is used for any form of communication?
3. What is an action profile?
4. What is an action definition?

5. Identify the four main processing types supported in post processing framework.
6. Identify the standard action profile for printing freight documents for road freight.
7. Locate the action definitions defined within action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.
8. Determine whether the action definition for /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR is active or inactive.
9. Explore the action definition settings for the action definition /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
10. What is meant by the Changeable in Dialog setting?
11. Identify the processing types defined for /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
12. Locate the form name for processing type external communication for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_CMR.
13. Identify the form type of the /SCMTMS/FP_CMR form.
14. Locate where the archiving for documents can be enabled.
15. What is the difference between start conditions and schedule conditions?

16. Identify the schedule condition maintained for /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
17. Locate where a default printer for this action is defined.
18. What is the function of an agent class?
19. Identify the agent class associated with the printing TOR objects.
20. Identify the action profiles associated with the /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING output agent.
21. Identify whether actions relating to the printing of documents for road are enabled.
22. Identify whether it is possible to skip the schedule condition checks for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_CMR.
23. Identify whether it is possible to skip the start condition checks for the action definition /
SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
24. Identify the output profiles associated with the freight order type F2##.

Unit 8
Solution 21
Create Configuration of Output Management
and Print Outputs
Create Configuration of Output Management and Print Outputs
Simulation: Create Configuration of Output Management and Print Outputs

For more information on Create Configuration of Output Management and Print
Outputs, please view the simulation in the lesson Output Management online in
Business Example
to set up output management and how to create outputs.
Note:
1. Create a road waybill document (CMR) for the freight order created in the exercise
"Execute Carrier Selection". To do so, open the freight order and change its execution
status to Ready for Transportation Execution. Review the waybill document.
column) to open it.
g) In the freight order, select ... → Execution Status → Ready for Transportation
Execution.
h) Choose Save.
i) Navigate to the Output Management tab.
j) From the Unprocessed actions, choose Road Waybill (Europe).

k) In the row for Road Waybill (Europe), choose Actions → Document Preview.
l) Review and then close the PDF document.
2. In Transportation Management, what framework is used for any form of communication?
Output management based on post processing framework.
3. What is an action profile?
An action profile is used to group action definitions that belong together. For example, an
action profile can be used to group all actions related to freight orders for road.
4. What is an action definition?
An action definition is the basic structure for an action. It defines characteristics of the
action such as the time of trigger and whether it can be executed from the UI.
5. Identify the four main processing types supported in post processing framework.
External communication, Method Call, Alert, and Workflow.
6. Identify the standard action profile for printing freight documents for road freight.
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD is the standard action profile for actions related to printing

freight documents for road freight.
b) Choose Cross-Application Components → Processes and Tools for Enterprise

Applications → Reusable Objects and Functions for BOPF Environment → PPF Adapter
for Output Management → Maintain PPF Settings.
c) Select the application /SCMTMS/TRANSPORTATION.
d) Choose Define Action Profile and Actions.
e) Check the list for an action profile with the description Actions for Print Documents
Road Freight.
7. Locate the action definitions defined within action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.

a) In the Action Profile table, choose the action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.
b) In the Dialog Structure screen area, choose Action Definition.
8. Determine whether the action definition for /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR is active or inactive.
The action definition is active because the Inactive checkbox is not selected.
a) In the /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR row, look at the Inactive checkbox. If the checkbox is

selected, the action definition is inactive.
9. Explore the action definition settings for the action definition /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.

a) In the list of action definitions, double-click /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
b) View the various settings for the action definition.
10. What is meant by the Changeable in Dialog setting?
If the Changeable in Dialog checkbox is not selected, actions triggered by the action
definition can no longer be manually changed after automatic determination.
11. Identify the processing types defined for /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
The external communication processing type is defined.
a) In the Dialog Structure, choose Processing Types.
b) Note the defined processing type.
12. Locate the form name for processing type external communication for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_CMR.
The form name is /SCMTMS/FP_CMR.
a) On the Display View “Processing Types” Overview screen, select the Document tab.
b) Look in the Form Name field.
13. Identify the form type of the /SCMTMS/FP_CMR form.
PDF-Based Forms.
a) Look in the Form Type field.
14. Locate where the archiving for documents can be enabled.

a) Select the Archiving tab.
b) Look in the Archive Mode field.
15. What is the difference between start conditions and schedule conditions?
Schedule conditions specify when actions are scheduled or generated for processing.
Start conditions specify when actions are triggered or processed.
16. Identify the schedule condition maintained for /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
The /BOFU/EVAL_SCHEDULE_CONDITION schedule condition is maintained.
a) Exit the Define Action Profile and Actions function.
b) On the Display View “PPF: Applications in Customizing”: Overview screen, select /

SCMTMS/TRANSPORTATION.

c) Choose Condition Configuration (Transportable Conditions).
d) In the Scheduling of Actions column, in the Action Profiles folder, choose Actions for
Print Documents Road Freight (double-click).
e) Choose (Technical Names) to view the technical names of the action profiles.
f) In the Actions for Print Documents Road Freight table, select the /SCMTMS/
PRINT_CMR action definition.
g) Open the Schedule Condition tab.
17. Locate where a default printer for this action is defined.

a) Open the Processing Details tab.
b) Open the Printer tab.
18. What is the function of an agent class?
An agent class can be used to capture business logic for processing or generating actions.
19. Identify the agent class associated with the printing TOR objects.
The agent class is /SCMTMS/CL_PPF_SERV_FOR_TOR.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Cross-Application Components → Processes and

Tools for Enterprise Applications → Reusable Objects and Functions for BOPF
Environment → PPF Adapter for Output Management → Maintain Output
Management Adapter Settings.
b) In the Output Agent column, locate /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING.
c) Look in the Agent Class for BO Node column.
20. Identify the action profiles associated with the /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING output agent.
/SCMTMS/TOR_CREATE_FWSD, /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_AIR, /SCMTMS/

TOR_PRINT_AIR_FU, /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_PARCEL_ROOT, /SCMTMS/
TOR_PRINT_ROAD, and /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_SEA.
a) Select the entry corresponding to the /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING output agent.
b) In the Dialog Structure, choose Assign PPF Profiles.
21. Identify whether actions relating to the printing of documents for road are enabled.
Yes, actions related to printing of documents for road are enabled.
a) Choose action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.
b) Look at the Enable checkbox.

22. Identify whether it is possible to skip the schedule condition checks for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_CMR.
No. The Can Gnrt. W/o Check (Can Generate Without Check) checkbox is unselected,
therefore it is not possible to skip the schedule condition checks.
a) In the Dialog Structure, choose Action Settings.
b) Select the action /SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
c) Choose (Details) to view the details of the action.
d) Look at the Can Gnrt. W/o Check (Can Generate Without Check) checkbox.
23. Identify whether it is possible to skip the start condition checks for the action definition /
SCMTMS/PRINT_CMR.
No. The Can Execute Without Condition Check checkbox is unselected, therefore it is not
possible to skip the start condition checks.
a) In the Dialog Structure, choose Processing Type Settings.
b) Look at the Can Execute Without Condition Check checkbox.
24. Identify the output profiles associated with the freight order type F2##.
/SCMTMS/TOR and /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD are the output profiles associated

with the freight order type F2##.
b) Choose Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order

→ Define Freight Order Types.
c) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management

→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order
→ Define Freight Order Types.
d) Select the freight order type F2## and choose (Details) to view the details.
e) In the Output Options section, check the maintained output profiles.

LESSON SUMMARY


Unit 8
Lesson 5
Track & Trace
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Execution Tracking
You use this function to determine whether the end user can manually report the execution of
transportation processes managed by TM, or not. For example, the end user reports that an
event has happened such as a freight order has arrived at a destination.
Execution Tracking reports the tracking of the following TM business documents:
● Freight Units
● Freight Orders and Freight Bookings
● Transportation Units
Features:
● No Execution Tracking: With this option selected, there is no tracking of executions. This is
the default option.
● Execution Tracking: With this option you allow execution tracking without an external
event management system. That is, the system automatically starts the tracking of
executions reported manually from transportation processes managed by TM. The data
this creates is stored in the TM database.
● Execution Tracking with External Event Management; With this option you allow execution
tracking with an external event management system. The system stores the data from the
tracking of executions in the TM database, but it can also send it to an external event
management system. This option requires the connection of an external event
management system, such as SAP Event Management. The use of SAP Event
Management means that an end user can use its simple in-built interfaces to report actual
events, such as a freight order has arrived. Further, the time that those actual events
occurred can be compared with the time they were expected to occur. In addition, SAP
Event Management allows events that are related but unexpected to be reported. Together
this means that for any tracked item a database record is always available including its last
known event. From that you can know whether that item is on track, late or whether an
unexpected has happened to it. You can also use rule-based processing in-built into SAP
Event Management to trigger automatic follow up activities.
You can see and change the current settings for execution tracking in Customizing. The path
in Customizing depends on the type of TM business document as follows:

● For freight orders, make the settings in Customizing for Transportation Management
under Freight Order Management Freight Order Define Freight Orders Types. Then you
select the Details button and under Execution Settings, select an option from the field
Execution Tracking Relevance.
● For freight bookings, make the settings in Customizing for Transportation Management
under Freight Order Management Freight Booking Define Freight Booking Types. Then you
● For transportation units, make the settings in Customizing for Transportation
Management under Freight Order Management Transportation Unit Define Transportation
Unit Types. Then you select the Details button and under Execution Settings, select an
option from the field Execution Tracking Relevance.
● For freight units, make the settings in Customizing for Transportation Management under
Freight Order Management Planning Freight Unit Define Freight Unit Types. Then you
Event Management
Event Management
Figure 198: Visibility Across Business Partners And IT Environments
Nowadays, supply chains are global and complex. End-to-end supply chain visibility is one of
the key factors in efficient supply chain operation and control. SAP Event Management is the
only application needed to provide this visibility, since it is available to all partners, including
customers. SAP Event Management can also work with multiple SAP and non-SAP
applications.
As companies expand their suite of IT products to handle more complex scenarios, they often
have to add systems to their ERP environment. This makes it difficult for business users and
management to gain a complete view of end-to-end processes and monitor potential service
issues. Therefore, it is imperative to have a tool that can incorporate information from several
systems and provide insight into how order fulfillment is progressing.

Lesson: Track & Trace
SAP Event Management makes processes, assets, and performance visible across the entire
supply chain. Extensive tracking and tracing functions allow process monitoring, automated
exception resolution, proactive alerting, as well as extensive reporting in a single solution.
The event management system is designed to work with several SAP ERP & S4 HANA
instances, if necessary. It can communicate with SAP CRM, where sales orders may be
received, and this communication is processed back to the customer to support order
fulfillment. SAP IBP may be responsible for creating the replenishment plan. SAP ERP or SAP
Manufacturing Execution may be responsible for communication and tracking progress on
the shop floor. SAP EWM (Extended Warehouse Management) may be responsible for the
picking and packing as part of the logistics execution.
Event Management in SAP TM

SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in
connection with SAP TM. The transportation execution visibility processes enable users in
roles such as transportation dispatcher, shipper, or ordering party, to track and monitor
planned events or to report an actual event.
Tracking and tracing is provided for the following business document types in SAP TM:
● Freight unit
● Freight order
● Freight booking
● Transportation unit
● Resource
● Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
In each case, the goal is to manage by exception, reduce time to action, and spend less time
fire-fighting.

Event Management Process
Figure 199: Events - Use Cases
Animation: Events - Use Cases

For more information on Events - Use Cases, please view the animation in the
lesson Track & Trace, online in the SAP Learning Hub.
Monitor, notify, analyze, and adjust - these are the four cornerstones of SAP Event
Management, and they contribute in providing an adaptive solution. The monitoring process
collects data from the various source systems. Notifications can be set up to be triggered,
with alerts sent to the parties responsible if a process deviates from its anticipated course.
Based on the alerts, the appropriate parties can then simulate adjustments and make any
necessary changes. Finally, in relation to analytics, SAP Event Management can be tied into
the SAP BW environment to support transportation management reviews.

Figure 201: Creating Event Handlers and Expected Events in TM
In the integration between SAP TM and SAP EM, two different interfaces and functions are
used, as follows:
1. Creation and update of the Event Handler with all expected events and other critical fields
such as parameter and tracking IDs.
2. Sending or reporting of events from the SAP TM system, for example, loading or unloading
events from freight unit or freight order.
To be able to create event handlers in SAP TM, you must configure the application object
types (AOTs). From the AOTs, the extractors are created. These extractors send the data to
SAP EM and create SAP EM event handlers.
Content of Application Object Types
Application Object Types contain the following:
● Expected events, with planned dates and times

● Tracking IDs that uniquely identify the trackable object or business document, for
example, a freight order
● Information and system parameters that contain information about the object
Content of Extractors
The extractors contain the following:
● A freight order
● A freight booking
● A freight unit

● A transportation unit
● Other objects
Figure 202: Reporting Events in SAP EM
An event handler represents a business document (for example, freight order, freight unit, or
transportation unit) or a business process (for example, within a Transportation Execution)
that is relevant to tracking or monitoring functions. SAP EM creates an event handler for each
object. The event handler contains all of the information necessary to track this application
object. It contains this information in a form that is independent of its origin, so that SAP EM
can map and track business processes in a uniform way.
The event handler information makes it possible to enable the monitoring of events that are
reported to SAP EM for an application object, and to check if the actual events occur in line
with the expected events. In SAP TM, event types are used to send or report events to SAP
EM.
GTT
The aim of SAP Logistics Business Network, global track and trace option is to capture,
process and store tracking information about tracked processes and objects. Then, it allows
business users to get real-time transparency of the execution of those processes. They can
query any tracked process and display its retrieved data from end to end.
Further, SAP Logistics Business Network, global track and trace option can use rule-based
triggering to automatically detect when certain predefined conditions occur such as delay or
damage to goods. The rules can also be used to trigger follow-up activities such as sending
emails to users or updating back-end systems.
SAP Logistics Business Network, global track and trace option is a cloud service. The service
is an optional package you can select as part of the SAP Logistics Business Network solution.
Features:

1. A cloud-based track and trace service to capture, process and store messages with tracking
information about business processes.
2. A cloud-based service that allows connected cloud apps to trace those business processes
by retrieving tracking information.
3. Tools for an administrator to define and model the business processes to be tracked and
their related events and properties. He or she can also configure business rules used by the
event-to-action engine to process and evaluate received event messages and to trigger
automated follow up actions.
4. Tools for an administrator to replicate master data (business partner, location and
product) from connected back-end systems.
5. Tools for an administrator to manage on-boarding, configuration and setup.
6. Apps for a business user, for example, to query any tracked process or object and display it
from end-to\u0002end, including to:
● display its milestones with planned and actual date/times
● display details of its processes
● report planned and unplanned events
● visualize related locations on a geographical map
LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Lesson 6
Discrepancy Management
LESSON OBJECTIVES
Discrepancy Management
The actual quantity cannot be estimated precisely beforehand, for example, when
transporting bulk freight. When the transportation execution starts, the actual quantity needs
to be recorded as well. This process in the SAP TM functionality is called discrepancy
handling. Discrepancies are a hassle for transportation execution because they might affect
the choice of vehicle resource being used for the transportation or lead to a different charge
calculation. Therefore, discrepancies need to be discussed with the shipper before
transportation can continue. The transportation process starts as usual, requested quantities
are entered into a forwarding order, and freight units are created out of this document. After
the freight units are planned, the execution of the transportation may begin. The carrier now
physically receives the cargo and checks the actual quantities against the requested
quantities. This checking and reporting is performed by the carrier and communicated to us
as the freight forwarder. We will then enter the actual quantities in the freight order’s items.
Figure 203: Freight Order Discrepancies Overview

Lesson: Discrepancy Management
Animation: Freight Order Discrepancies Overview

For more information on Freight Order Discrepancies Overview, please view the
animation in the lesson Discrepancy Management, online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
If the carrier does not receive the cargo as planned, you need to report the discrepancy. In
general, you can differentiate between two types of discrepancies as follows:
● Quantity discrepancies: The actual quantities are different from the requested quantities
because of a change in the quantity, gross weight, or volume.
- The actual quantity, the actual weight, or the actual volume is lower than expected.
- The actual quantity, the actual weight, or the actual volume is larger than expected.
- You have received unexpected cargo.
● Other discrepancies: Discrepancies that are not caused by a change in quantities are
called other discrepancies. If the cargo is damaged, or documents are missing for the
cargo, these events can be recorded as other discrepancies.
- There is a dangerous goods item that you have not designated as such.
- The packaging of an item is damaged.
- You have received over dimensional or high-value cargo.
- A different equipment type or package type has been used.
Customizing Discrepancy
Before you can handle any discrepancies in SAP TM, you define the discrepancy types in
Customizing.
You can define different types of discrepancies in Customizing by following the IMG menu
path Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Define Discrepancy Profile.
In this Customizing activity, you can define discrepancy types and associate them with
predefined events and discrepancy subcategories. Further, among the discrepancy types
associated with the same event, you must select one discrepancy type as the default
discrepancy type. You can also define lower or upper discrepancy tolerances.
You can define discrepancy profiles. If you do so, you can assign discrepancy types with
different stop categories to them. You can assign discrepancy profiles to freight order types,
freight booking types, and transportation unit types.
Methods of Entering Discrepancies

The following options are available when reporting discrepancies:
● Report quantity discrepancies in the Items tab of FO, FB, or TU and actual values in the
Quantities tab of the item details.
● Report other discrepancies in the Items tab of FO, FB, or TU and enter detailed information
in the Discrepancies tab of the item details.
● Add any necessary attachments to a reported discrepancy within the Attachments column
on the Discrepancies tab of the item details.

● Add any necessary notes to a reported discrepancy within either the Note or the Notes
column on the Discrepancies tab of the item details.
● It is possible to unassigned FUs for which discrepancies have been reported. FUs can be
unassigned from a FO, FB, or TU in the FO/FB/TU screen or in the transportation cockpit.
While the discrepancy and the block or blocks still exist on the freight unit level, they are
removed in the FB, FO, or TU. This means that the cargo (without the goods of the
unassigned FU) can proceed with further processing.
Features
Figure 205: Discrepancy Management Features
Animation: Discrepancy Management Features

For more information on Discrepancy Management Features , please view the
animation in the lesson Discrepancy Management, online in the SAP Learning
Hub.
When a discrepancy is reported in an FO, FB, or TU document, the system automatically

blocks the subsequent stages of the transport when reported discrepancies are not yet
resolved.
For freight units, further planning and execution are blocked.
For freight orders, freight bookings, and transportation units, execution and invoicing blocks
are set.
In SAP TM, you can select a checkbox in the freight order, freight booking document, or
transportation unit that prevents the system from setting a block.
If there are unresolved discrepancies in a document, it is not possible to set the freight
execution status to Freight Ready for (Un-) Loading. Moreover, a block on an unresolved
discrepancy implies that no goods receipt may take place; therefore, you cannot set the cargo
receipt status.

Resolving Discrepancies
During execution, discrepancies can be determined between the actual quantities and the
quantities that have been ordered by the customer. Furthermore, exceptions can occur, such
as missing or damaged cargo. This data can be sent from SAP EWM to SAP TM, and either
copied into the freight order or freight booking automatically, or entered into the freight order
or freight booking manually.
The customer service agent or transportation planner must decide with the ordering party
how to proceed with the discrepancies. Depending on this decision, the customer service
agent can adjust the ordered data to the actual data, or can plan the subsequent delivery of
missing cargo.
To support the exception handling process, the following functions of SAP TM have been
added or enhanced:
● Discrepancy profile with the option to define discrepancy subcategories
● Personal object worklist (POWL) for discrepancies
● Copy of actual data from freight document to ordered data of forwarding order
● Change of forwarding order data after execution has started
● Assignment of local freight document items to forwarding orders and freight units
● Manual freight unit split after execution has started
● Manual corrections of items, for example, after transfer of data from SAP EWM
Conditions for Using the Resolve and Undo Resolve Buttons

You can use the actions associated with the Resolve button for specific discrepancy types
only. The following conditions apply:
● Resolve discrepancy:
This action is permitted for all discrepancy types, except for discrepancies with the
subcategory Missing Cargo. You cannot execute the Resolve action for this subcategory if
the Quantity Update column in the Customizing activity Define Discrepancy Profile has the
value Split Predecessor Document.
● Resolve missing cargo (retain FU item):
You can execute this action for discrepancies with the subcategory Missing Cargo only if
● Resolve missing cargo (delete FU item):
You can execute this action for discrepancies with the subcategory Missing Cargo only if
● Resolve unexpected cargo (assign FWO item):
You can execute this action only for discrepancies with the subcategory Unexpected
Cargo.
You can use the action associated with the Undo Resolve button for specific discrepancy
types only. The following conditions apply:

● The discrepancy must have the status Resolved.

● The discrepancy must not have the subcategory Missing Cargo. If the discrepancy does
have the subcategory Missing Cargo, the action Undo Resolve can be executed only if the
Quantity Update column in the Customizing activity Define Discrepancy Profile does not
have the value Split Predecessor Document.

Unit 8
Exercise 22
Configure Discrepancy Management and
Report a Discrepancy
Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a Discrepancy
Simulation: Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a Discrepancy

For more information on Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a
Discrepancy, please view the simulation in the lesson Discrepancy Management
Business Example
to set up discrepancy management.
Note:
1. Will the document get blocked if a general discrepancy (discrepancy type 1000) gets
reported?
2. Which quantity deviation (in percentage) will lead to a block if missing quantity is reported
with discrepancy type S4TO?
3. Create a Discrepancy Profile DISCS4## and assign the discrepancy types 1000, 2010, and
S4TO to it. Assign the discrepancy profile to your freight order type F2##.

● Division: 00
5. Enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-## and selection
profiles for freight units and freight orders S4TM2-SEL-##. Use transportation cockpit
layout TCLAYOUT-SIMPLE. Create a freight order from the shipping point SP_1010 to
customer TM2G##-01 using vehicle resource TM2FTL-## by assigning the freight unit
created in the previous step to the vehicle resource. Save your planning result. Use the
following data:
Field Value
7. Navigate to the freight order and trigger delivery creation. Report loading and departure.
8. What is the execution status of the freight order now? What is the logistical execution
status?
9. Has a discrepancy been reported for the material in the freight order?
10. The driver calls you to report that while unloading, he realizes that there are only 8 PCs of
material TM-MAT-01 on the truck. In Cargo Management, report the actual quantity of 8
PCs on the truck.
12. What date was the quantity discrepancy reported?

13. Is there a block on the freight order? Why?
14. Report a general discrepancy for the freight order with type 1000 and enter a reason for
the discrepancy "Material is labelled incorrectly.".
15. Determine the status of the freight unit related Item 10 of the freight order.
16. Identify the reasons for the block on the freight unit.
17. Resolve the discrepancy in the freight order.
18. Is there a block on the freight order?
19. Determine the status of the freight unit for the Item 10 after the discrepancy has been
resolved

Unit 8
Solution 22
Configure Discrepancy Management and
Report a Discrepancy
Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a Discrepancy
Simulation: Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a Discrepancy

For more information on Configure Discrepancy Management and Report a
Discrepancy, please view the simulation in the lesson Discrepancy Management
Business Example
to set up discrepancy management.
Note:
1. Will the document get blocked if a general discrepancy (discrepancy type 1000) gets
reported?
No. The checkbox No Block is checked for discrepancy type 1000.

Discrepancy Profile.
c) Check discrepancy type 1000.
2. Which quantity deviation (in percentage) will lead to a block if missing quantity is reported
with discrepancy type S4TO?
The tolerance (lower and upper tolerance) is 10%. Deviations from this tolerance will lead
to a block.
a) Check discrepancy type S4TO.
3. Create a Discrepancy Profile DISCS4## and assign the discrepancy types 1000, 2010, and
S4TO to it. Assign the discrepancy profile to your freight order type F2##.


Discrepancy Profile.
c) In the dialog structure, double-click on Discrepancy Profiles and choose New Entries.
d) Enter DISCS4## as the name of the discrepancy profile and the following description:
Discrepancy Profile User ##.
e) Select the line with the new entry and, from the dialog structure, choose Assign
Discrepancy Types to Profile.
f) Choose New Entries and enter the discrepancy types 1000, 2010, and S4TO.
g) Save and leave the customizing activity.
h) In the backend system, execute transaction SPRO and press F5.
i) Choose Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order

→ Define Freight Order Type.
j) Select Freight Order Type F2## and choose Details.
k) In Execution Settings, enter DISCS4## as your Discrepancy Profile.
l) Save and leave the customizing activity.
● Division: 00
● Division: 00
c) Choose Continue.

e) Choose Save.
5. Enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile S4TM2-PLAN-## and selection
profiles for freight units and freight orders S4TM2-SEL-##. Use transportation cockpit
layout TCLAYOUT-SIMPLE. Create a freight order from the shipping point SP_1010 to
customer TM2G##-01 using vehicle resource TM2FTL-## by assigning the freight unit
created in the previous step to the vehicle resource. Save your planning result. Use the
following data:
Field Value
c) Choose Continue.
d) Select the freight unit to customer TM2G##-01 (the one created in the previous step
to be identified by its sales order number) in the Freight Unit Stages screen area.
e) Select the vehicle resource TM2FTL-## in the Trucks screen area.
f) Choose Assign Selected Items.
g) Choose Save.
a) In Road Freight Orders, select your freight order.
b) Choose Carrier Selection → Automatic.
c) Choose Save.
7. Navigate to the freight order and trigger delivery creation. Report loading and departure.
a) In the Road Freight Orders screen area, click on your freight order number.
b) In the freight order, select Follow Up → Create Deliveries.
c) Choose Save.
d) Choose Edit.
e) In the freight order, select ... → Execution Status → Set to Loaded.
f) Choose Save.

g) In the freight order, select ... → Execution Status → Set to Loaded.
h) Choose Save.
8. What is the execution status of the freight order now? What is the logistical execution
status?
The execution status has changed to In Execution. The logistical execution status has
changed to SP_1010 Departed with timestamp.
a) Navigate to the Statuses tab. Check the statuses.
No discrepancy has been reported.
b) Select the line for Product 10 Material for TM.
c) In the Product 10 Material for TM, open the Discrepancies tab.
10. The driver calls you to report that while unloading, he realizes that there are only 8 PCs of
material TM-MAT-01 on the truck. In Cargo Management, report the actual quantity of 8
PCs on the truck.
b) In the Change Hierarchy dropdown, select Cargo Management.
c) In the Actual Quantity column for product Product 10 Material for TM, enter 8.
d) Choose Save.
Yes, a discrepancy has been reported.
12. What date was the quantity discrepancy reported?
Today’s date.

13. Is there a block on the freight order? Why?
Yes. The quantity discrepancy type permits a ± 10% deviation from the planned quantity
without a block. The order quantity is 10 pieces, so the permissible deviation is ± 1. Actual
quantities greater than 11 and less than 9 are outside the tolerance limits and, therefore,
the document will be blocked.
a) On the Discrepancies tab, locate the No Block field.
b) The No Block checkbox is not selected, so the freight order is blocked.
Note:
You can also see this on the Blocking Information tab.
c) Navigate to the Blocking Information tab.
14. Report a general discrepancy for the freight order with type 1000 and enter a reason for
the discrepancy "Material is labelled incorrectly.".
d) Choose Insert and enter discrepancy type 1000.
e) In the Note column, enter a description of the discrepancy: Material is labelled

incorrectly.
f) Save the freight order.
15. Determine the status of the freight unit related Item 10 of the freight order.
There is a red light next to the freight unit. The red light means that the freight unit is
blocked.
a) In the freight order, choose the Document Flow tab.
b) In the Document Hierarchy column, check the status (stop light) icon in the row of the
freight unit.
16. Identify the reasons for the block on the freight unit.
There is a planning and execution block, because a discrepancy was reported for the
freight unit item in the freight order. Choose Details to find out more information about the
blocks.
a) To open the freight unit, in the Document Flow tab, choose the freight unit number.
b) In the freight unit, choose the Statuses tab.

17. Resolve the discrepancy in the freight order.

a) In the freight order, choose the Items tab.
b) Choose the Product 10 PRODTM-00 row.
c) On the Discrepancies tab, select Quantity Discrepancy and choose Resolve → Resolve
(Delete Missing Cargo).
d) Save your changes.
18. Is there a block on the freight order?
No. The block was removed when the discrepancy was resolved.
a) Choose the Blocking Information tab.
b) Check the Block statuses.
19. Determine the status of the freight unit for the Item 10 after the discrepancy has been
resolved
There is no block on the freight unit.
a) In the freight order, choose the Document Flow tab.
b) Check the status of the freight unit.

LESSON SUMMARY

Unit 8
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following are the allowed transportation unit categories?

X A Container
X B Railcar
X C Trailer
X D Vehicle resource
2. You can also assign valid item types to your service order types.
X True
X False

X A SAP EWM and SAP TM run as part of the SAP S/4HANA system since 1709.
X B SAP S/4HANA was designed to reflect the principle of one design idea.
X C Direct access to master data is not possible in the SAP S/4HANA environment.
4. Transportation Unit is not used when using Advance Shipping and Receiving functionality?
X True
X False

5. Which of the following are conditions necessary for PPF Output Management?
X A Scheduling Condition
X B Spool Condition
X C Starting Condition
X D Update Condition
6. When a discrepancy is reported in a freight order document, what blocks are applied to
the freight order?
X A Planning block
X B Execution block
X C Invoicing block
X D Delivery block

Sap TM2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sap TM2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sap TM2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S4TM2

Planning and Execution in SAP

© 2021 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. iii

American English is the standard used in this handbook.

This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation

Related or Additional Information

User interface control Example text

Window title Example text

iv © Copyright. All rights reserved.

vii Course Overview

1 Unit 1: Transportation Management Overview

3 Lesson: SAP TM Overview and Evolution

19 Unit 2: Transportation Management Master Data

21 Lesson: Business Partners

63 Unit 3: Creation of Transportation Requirements

65 Lesson: Defining Transportation Relevance for Orders and

141 Unit 4: Transportation Planning Preparation

142 Lesson: Transportation Planning

© Copyright. All rights reserved. v

196 Lesson: Performing Interactive Planning

227 Unit 6: Automatic Transportation Planning

228 Lesson: Plan with the VSR Optimizer

273 Unit 7: Subcontracting, Load Planning, and Short-Cut-Process

274 Lesson: Carrier Selection

323 Unit 8: Transportation Execution

325 Lesson: Transportation Units and Service Orders

vi © Copyright. All rights reserved.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. vii

● Understand the SAP TM evolution and timeline

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 1

2 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

SAP TM Overview and Evolution

Figure 1: Comprehensive Transportation Management Coverage

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 3

Animation: Comprehensive Transportation Management Coverage

Evolution of SAP Transportation Management

4 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Figure 3: SAP TM Evolution

Animation: SAP TM Evolution

From SAP S/4HANA 1709, Transportation Management becomes part of S/4HANA

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 5

Figure 5: Basic Shipping and LE-TRA

Differences Between Basic Shipping and Advanced Transportation

Figure 6: Comparison of Basic Shipping and Advanced Transportation

6 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Detailed Description of Functional Difference

Advanced Transportation Management is defined as follows:

Best Practice Scenarios

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 7

8 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Animation: Deployment Scenarios

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 9

Figure 8: Deployment Scenarios 1 & 2

Figure 9: Deployment Scenario 3 & 4

10 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Figure 10: Migration Path and Deployment Options

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 11

12 © Copyright. All rights reserved.